You are on page 1of 210

RCS-978E

Transformer Protection
Instruction Manual

Nanjing Nari-Relays Electric Co., Ltd.


RCS-978E Transformer Protection

Preface
Before using this product, please read this chapter carefully.

This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the equipment. Before
installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read and understood.

Instructions and Warnings

The following indicators and standard definitions are used:

DANGER means that death, severe personal injury, or considerable equipment damage will
occur if safety precautions are disregarded.

WARNING means the death, severe personal, or considerable equipment damage could occur
if safety precautions are disregarded.

CAUTION means the light personal injury or equipment damage may occur if safety
precautions are disregarded. This particularly applies to damage to the device and to
resulting damage of the protected equipment.

WARNING!
The firmware may be upgraded to add new features or enhance/modify existing features, please
make sure that the version of this manual is compatible with the product in your hand.

WARNING!
During operation of electrical equipment, certain parts of these devices are under high voltage.
Severe personal injury or significant equipment damage could result from improper behavior.

Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment or in the vicinity of this equipment. These
personnel must be familiar with all warnings and service procedures described in this manual, as
well as safety regulations.

In particular, the general facility and safety regulations for work with high-voltage equipment must
be observed. Noncompliance may result in death, injury, or significant equipment damage.

DANGER!
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be
opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a dangerously high
voltage.

WARNING!
l Exposed terminals

Do not touch the exposed terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD i


RCS-978E Transformer Protection

l Residual voltage

Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power supply. It
takes a few seconds for the voltage to discharge.

CAUTION!
l Earth

The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed

l Operating environment

The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient environment detailed in the
specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.

l Ratings

Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check that they
conform to the equipment ratings.

l Printed circuit board

Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when DC power to the equipment is on, as this
may cause the equipment to malfunction.

l External circuit

When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully check the
supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.

l Connection cable

Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.

Copyright
Version: RCS-978E V3.03 T060407 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Manual: V1.0 99 Shengtai Rd. Jiangning, Nanjing 211100,China
P/N: EN_YJBH1002.0091.1101 Tel: 86-25-52127776, Fax: 86-25-52127841
Website: www.nari-relays.com
Copyright © NR 2006. All rights reserved Email: international@nari-relays.com

We reserve all rights to this document and to the information


contained herein. Improper use in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties is strictly forbidden except where
expressly authorized.

The information in this manual is carefully checked periodically,


and necessary corrections will be included in future editions. If
nevertheless any errors are detected, suggestions for correction or
improvement are greatly appreciated.
We reserve the rights to make technical improvements without
notice.

ii NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Instruction

Table of Contents
Preface .............................................................................................................................................. i
Table of Contents........................................................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction............................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Application ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.2 Protective Functions........................................................................................................ 1
1.3 Typical application of RCS-978E protection equipment .............................................. 2
1.4 Features............................................................................................................................. 3
Chapter 2 Technical Data........................................................................................................... 7
Chapter 3 Operation Theory.................................................................................................... 11
3.1 Configuration Principle for High Rated Transformer ................................................. 11
3.1.1 Duplicated main and backup protection .................................................................... 11
3.1.2 Using fault detector for security of tripping ................................................................ 11
3.2 Fault Detector ................................................................................................................. 12
3.2.1 Fault detector of differential currents ......................................................................... 12
3.2.2 Fault detector of DPFC differential current................................................................ 12
3.2.3 Fault detector of residual differential protection, etc.................................................. 13
3.2.4 Fault detector of phase current.................................................................................. 13
3.2.5 Fault detector of calculated residual overcurrent ...................................................... 13
3.2.6 Fault detector of external residual current (if available) ............................................ 14
3.2.7 Fault detector of residual overvoltage (if available)................................................... 14
3.2.8 Fault detector of DPFC phase-to-phase overcurrent (if available)............................ 14
3.2.9 Fault detector of negative sequence current (if available) ........................................ 14
3.3 Current Differential Element.......................................................................................... 15
3.3.1 Current differential calculation ................................................................................... 15
3.3.2 Influence factors and countermeasures .................................................................... 18
3.4 DPFC Current Differential Element............................................................................... 22
3.4.1 Operation characteristic of DPFC.............................................................................. 22
3.4.2 Influence and countermeasure of DPFC differential protection ................................ 23
3.5 Residual Differential Protection, etc. ........................................................................... 23
3.5.1 Characteristic of residual differential protection ........................................................ 23
3.5.2 Influences and countermeasures of residual protection............................................ 24
3.5.3 Characteristic of common-and-serial-windings differential protection....................... 25
3.5.4 Alarm or blocking of CT circuit failure........................................................................ 26
3.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Controlled by Composite Voltage .................... 26
3.6.1 Summary of application ............................................................................................. 26
3.6.2 Directional overcurrent protection.............................................................................. 27
3.6.3 Overcurrent protection with composite voltage element control ............................... 28
3.6.4 Effects of VT fail on composite voltage element and directional relay ...................... 28
3.6.5 Effects of local side VT disabled on composite voltage and direction ...................... 29
3.7 Residual Overcurrent Protection.................................................................................. 29
3.7.1 Summary of application ............................................................................................. 29

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD iii


Chapter 1 Instruction

3.7.2 Directional Residual current....................................................................................... 30


3.8 Overexcitation Volts/Hz Protection............................................................................... 32
3.9 Phase-to-Phase Distance Protection ........................................................................... 33
3.9.1 Summary of application ............................................................................................. 33
3.9.2 Operation theory of distance protection (optional) .................................................... 33
3.9.3 Blocking during power swing ..................................................................................... 34
3.9.4 Effect of VT circuit failure on distance protection ...................................................... 35
3.10 Ground Overcurrent Protection, etc. for Transformer Earthed via Air Gap........... 36
3.11 Residual Overvoltage Protection on LV Side ............................................................ 36
3.12 VT and CT Circuit Failure ............................................................................................ 36
3.12.1 VT circuit failure detection ....................................................................................... 36
3.12.2 CT circuits failure detection ..................................................................................... 36
3.13 Protection of other Abnormalities .............................................................................. 37
Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram ............................................................... 39
4.1 Percentage Differential Protection Logic Diagram ..................................................... 39
4.2 DPFC percentage Differential Protection Logic Diagram .......................................... 40
4.3 Logic Diagram of Residual Differential Protection, etc.............................................. 40
4.4 Phase-to-Phase Distance Protection Logic Diagram ................................................. 41
4.5 Logic Diagram of Directional Overcurrent Protection with Composite Voltage
Blocking ..................................................................................................................................... 42
4.6 Logic Diagram of Residual Overcurrent Protection ................................................... 43
4.6.1 Definite time residual overcurrent logic diagram ....................................................... 43
4.6.2 Inverse time residual overcurrent protection logic diagram....................................... 44
Chapter 5 Hardware Description ............................................................................................ 45
5.1 Front and Rear Panel Interfaces ................................................................................... 45
5.1.1 Front panel interface layout ....................................................................................... 45
5.1.2 Introduction of various part of the front panel............................................................ 45
5.1.3 Rear panel interface layout........................................................................................ 46
5.1.4 Connectors and terminals.......................................................................................... 46
5.2 Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................................. 56
5.2.1 Function block diagram.............................................................................................. 56
5.2.2 Operational processing.............................................................................................. 56
5.2.3 Inputs listed by function ............................................................................................. 57
5.2.4 Output ........................................................................................................................ 58
Chapter 6 Parameters .............................................................................................................. 61
6.1 Equipment Parameters .................................................................................................... 61
6.2 Power System Parameters ............................................................................................ 63
6.3 Settings of Main Protection........................................................................................... 67
6.4 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 1..................................................................... 74
6.5 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 2..................................................................... 84
6.6 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 3..................................................................... 95
6.7 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 4..................................................................... 98
6.8 Settings of Backup Protection of Common Winding ............................................... 102
Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface ................................................................................... 105

iv NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Instruction

7.1 General .......................................................................................................................... 105


7.1.1 Functionality............................................................................................................. 105
7.1.2 Keypad ..................................................................................................................... 106
7.1.3 LED indicators.......................................................................................................... 106
7.2 Descriptions of Display on LCD.................................................................................. 107
7.2.1 Normal operation status report ................................................................................ 107
7.2.2 Operation report....................................................................................................... 107
7.2.3 Abnormality report (AUTOSUPERV REPORT) ....................................................... 110
7.2.4 Change of binary input report (BINCHANGE REPORT)......................................... 112
7.3 Command Menu............................................................................................................ 114
7.3.1 General .................................................................................................................... 114
7.3.2 Command menu of RCS-978E................................................................................ 114
7.4 Use of assistant Test Software-DBG-2000 ................................................................. 122
7.4.1 Function summary of DBG-2000 communication software..................................... 122
7.4.2 Connection of protection equipment and PC........................................................... 122
7.4.3 Configuration of PC and the software before use ................................................... 123
7.4.4 Operation instruction of the software....................................................................... 124
Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records............................................................. 125
8.1 Automatic Supervision ................................................................................................ 125
8.1.1 Relay self-monitoring and test ................................................................................. 125
8.1.2 Relay self-supervision.............................................................................................. 125
8.1.3 Secondary circuit monitoring ................................................................................... 126
8.1.4 Failure alarms information ....................................................................................... 126
8.2 Metering......................................................................................................................... 130
8.2.1 Voltage and current on each side............................................................................ 130
8.2.2 Corrected voltage and current on each side ........................................................... 133
8.2.3 Calculated angle of voltages and currents on each side......................................... 136
8.2.4 Binary inputs ............................................................................................................ 138
8.3 Event Records and Sequence Events Record .......................................................... 139
8.3.1 Summary of application ........................................................................................... 140
8.3.2 Event records........................................................................................................... 140
8.3.3 Fault recording ......................................................................................................... 140
8.3.4 Normal recording ..................................................................................................... 141
8.4 Example of Printed Fault Report ................................................................................ 142
8.4.1 Explanation of the printed fault report...................................................................... 145
8.4.2 Information got from report analysis ........................................................................ 145
Chapter 9 Communication ........................................................................................ 147
9.1 Communication with Substation Automation System ............................................. 147
9.1.1 Communication port................................................................................................. 147
9.1.2 Description of message in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol............................................. 147
9.2 Communication with Printer ....................................................................................... 151
9.3 Communication with Local Computer ....................................................................... 151
9.4 Communication with External Time Synchronization Source................................. 151
Chapter 10 Installation and Test ........................................................................................... 153

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD v


Chapter 1 Instruction

10.1 Installation................................................................................................................... 153


10.1.1 Mechanical installation........................................................................................... 153
10.2.2 Electrical installation and wiring............................................................................. 153
10.3 Checkout ..................................................................................................................... 156
10.3.1 General description of checkout ............................................................................ 156
10.3.2 Safety precautions and cautions before tests ....................................................... 156
10.3.3 Preparations........................................................................................................... 157
10.3.4 Hardware tests....................................................................................................... 158
10.4 Functional Test ........................................................................................................... 167
10.4.1 Preparation for test ................................................................................................ 167
10.4.2 Differential relay ..................................................................................................... 167
10.4.3 DPFC differential relay test.................................................................................... 175
10.4.4 Residual percentage differential relay test ............................................................ 175
10.4.5 Common-and-serial-windings differential protection relay test for auto-transformer
............................................................................................................................................... 175
10.4.6 Overcurrent relay test ............................................................................................ 175
10.4.7 On-load test ........................................................................................................... 176
10.5 Putting RCS-978E into Service ................................................................................. 177
Appendix A Setting Sheet ..................................................................................................... 179
A.1 Equipment Settings ..................................................................................................... 179
A.2 Power System Settings ............................................................................................... 179
A.3 Settings of Main Protection ........................................................................................ 180
A.4 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 1 .................................................................. 181
A.5 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 2 .................................................................. 183
A.6 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 3 .................................................................. 186
A.7 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 4 .................................................................. 187
A.8 Settings of Backup Protection of Common Winding............................................... 188
Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (user version) ............................................................. 191
B.1 General.......................................................................................................................... 191
B.1.1 Menu bar ................................................................................................................. 191
B.1.2 Tool bar .................................................................................................................... 194
B.2 Sampled Value Displaying .......................................................................................... 195
B.3 Settings Reading and Modification............................................................................ 197
B.4 Report............................................................................................................................ 198
B.4.1 Tripping report ......................................................................................................... 198
B.4.2 Diagnose report ....................................................................................................... 200
B.4.3 Change of status report........................................................................................... 200
B.5 Trip Tests....................................................................................................................... 201
B.5.1 Protection tripping test (only for special type of equipment)................................... 201
B.5.2 Communication with the host computer test ........................................................... 201

vi NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Instruction

Chapter 1 Introduction

1.1 Application

The RCS-978 is a series of microprocessor-based transformer protective relays suited to the


protection of all voltage level transformers with various kinds of winding connection. The relay
can provide all necessary electrical protective functions for a two to three winding transformer or
an autotransformer. The model selection depends on the type of transformer and the protective
functions required. This manual is mainly prepared for the RCS-978E relay.

The RCS-978E is designed for transformers operating at 220kV or above voltage levels. It suits for
three winding schemes or autotransformer schemes (at most 4 three-phase CT inputs, 1 for high
voltage side, 1 for middle voltage side, 2 for low voltage side; 3 three-phase VT inputs, for each
side). Main protection and backup protection share data gathered from CT and VT.

1.2 Protective Functions

l Main protective functions

− Current differential protection (87T);


− Unrestrained differential protection (50/87UT);
− DPFC differential protection (7/87DT);
− Residual current differential protection (87NT);
− Common-and-serial-windings differential protection only for autotransformers (87ST).

l Backup protective functions

− Three-stage directional overcurrent protection at HV side and MV side (inverse or definite


time and direction are optional) (67P, 50P, 51P);
− “Gap” residual overcurrent protection at HV side and MV side;
− Five-stage directional overcurrent protection for LV side (direction is optional) (67P, 50P,
51P);
− Three-stage directional residual overcurrent protection for HV side and MV side (inverse or
definite time and direction are optional) (67G, 50P, 51P);
− Residual overcurrent protection for HV side neutral and MV side neutral (50N, 51N);
− Residual overvoltage protection for HV side neutral and MV side neutral (59N);
− Breaker failure protection for HV side and MV side (50BF);
− Residual overvoltage protection for LV side (59G);
− Overcurrent protection for LV side winding (combined current) (50P, 51P);
− Overcurrent protection for common winding of autotransformer (50P, 51P);
− Residual overcurrent protection for common winding of autotransformer (50P, 51P);
− Voltage control element for overcurrent protection;
− Overload alarm function (49);
− Air blast Initiation function (49);
− On-load tap change (OLTC) blocking function during overload.

l Auxiliary functions

− Circuit breaker monitoring;

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 1


Chapter 1 Instruction

− Current transformer supervision;


− Voltage transformer supervision;
− Operating condition supervision;
− Voltage and current drift auto adjustment;
− Self diagnostic test;
− Fault Recorder;
− Fault Locator;
− GPS clock synchronization;
− 32 fault event records, 32 alarm event records and 32 binary input status reports;
− High resolution oscillography of last 8 oscillograms (compatible with international COM-
TRADE format)
− Rear communication ports: 4 RS-485 with IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, 1 RS-485 with clock
synchronization, 1 RS-232 or RS-485 with printer;
− 2 RS-485 ports could be optionally provided by optical interfaces;
− Front communication port: 1 RS-232 for testing and setting.

1.3 Typical application of RCS-978E protection equipment

Fig. 1.3.1 shows at most four three-phase CT inputs could be configured into the current
differential elements in the RCS-978E relay.
bus 1 bus 2

* 1
*2
1 One equipment consists of all the
protections showed inthe diagram.
TV1-2 And all AC current/voltage circuits are
bypass bus

connectedonce.
>50N,51N

1 2
2 The 2nd protection function can be
* TA1 * achieved by 2nd CTs and 2nd
equipment. So it can provide
duplicated main andbackup
TV1-1 protection tothe transformer.

> 87T
>67P,50P,51P >50/87T
>50N,51N > 7/87T
bypass bus
220 kV
>50N,51N

* * 110 kV
TA6 TA7
> gap zeroseq.overcurrent
(or overvoltage)protection
* * TA8 > 67P, 50P,51P 2
TA9 > 50N,51N 2
*
*

> 67P, 50P,51P TA2


1
1
*

>gapzero seq.overcurrent
(or overvoltage)protection
> 59N

>67P,50P,51P > 59G TV2-1 TV2-2

bus 1
> 67P,50P,51P bus 2
>67P,50P,51P

2 >59G 2
TA3 * *
TA4
1 1
* *
TV3 TV4

bus 1 bus 2

Fig. 1.3.1 Typical application of RCS-978E for three windings transformer

2 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Instruction

Fig. 1.3.2 shows another typical application with four CT inputs for autotransformer. One CT
input is at HV side, one is at MV side, and two are at LV side. Two branches at LV side are all
connected to single bus.

BUS1 BUS2 BYPASS BUS


1 2
* * 1. One equipment consists of all the
protections showed in the diagram.
TV1- And all AC current/voltage circuits are
2
connectedonce.

2. The 2nd protection function can be


1 2 achieved by 2nd CTs and 2nd
* TA1
* equipment. So it can provide duplicated
main and backup protection to the
transformer.
TV1-
1 220 kV

Ø 67P,50P,51P Ø 87T
Ø 50/87T
Ø 50N,51N Ø 7/87T
BYPASS BUS

Ø 50P,51P
(SIDE 1)
* 110 kV
(SIDE 2)
* * TA5
Ø 50P,51P
TA10
* Ø 50N,51N
2 2

*
*
Ø 87NT TA2
Ø 87T
Ø 50N,51N 1 1
10 kV *

*
Ø 50P,51P

TV2- TV2-
1 2
Ø 50P,51P
Ø 59G

BUS1
BUS2
Ø 50P,51P Ø 50P,51P

2 2
TA3 * Ø 59G TA4 *
1 1
* *
TV3 TV4 (SIDE4)
(SIDE3)
BUS1 BUS2

Fig. 1.3.2 Typical application of RCS-978E for autotransformer

1.4 Features

l Parallel calculation of double CPU system

The hardware comprises a 32-bit microprocessor and two digital signal processors (DSP). Three
CPUs can operate in parallel. The 32-bit microprocessor performs logic calculation and two DSPs
perform the protection calculation. High performance hardware ensures real time calculation of all
protection relays within a sampling interval.

On the premise of 24 samples per cycle, all data measurement, calculation and logic
discrimination could be done within one sampling period. The event recording and protection logic

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 3


Chapter 1 Instruction

calculation are completed simultaneously.

l Independent fault detector

There is a set of independent fault detectors in the MON module in the RCS-978 relay. Its
operation supervises the tripping outputs. They will connect positive pole of power supply to output
relays when operate. There are different fault detectors in the CPU module used for various
protective functions. The relay could drive a tripping output only when the fault detectors in the
CPU module and the fault dectors in the MON module operate simultaneously. This kind of
independent supervision of tripping outputs using fault detectors can avoid any maloperation
possibly caused by any hardware component fails. This highly increases the security.

l Duplicated main and backup protection principle

Duplicated main and backup protection integrated in one set of protection equipment.

l Program modularization

Modulizational design of software makes function design of protection more flexible and
convenient.

l Reliable percentage differential protection

Characteristic of percentage differential with restraint from origin is used and criteria for current
transformer saturation are accompanied.

l Distinct method of phase shift for secondary differential current

△→Y transfer method is used to shift phase angle of secondary current at each side of the
transformer, thus the faulty and healthy phase can reserve its characteristic after phase shifting
and the restraint of inrush current can be phase-segregated.

l Provide two inrush distinguishing method

Two criteria, second harmonic and waveform are available for inrush current discrimination. Any
one of them or both of them can be selected.

l High sensitive and securable DPFC differential protection

DPFC percentage differential protection is not influenced by the load current and is sensitive to
small internal fault current within the transformer. Its performance against current transformer
saturation is also good.

l Practical residual percentage differential protection

Residual current at each side of transformer is calculated internally. The secondary residual
current of CT is balanced by software adjustment. Polarity of CT can be examined easily. Positive
sequence current restraint is adopted to eliminate influence on residual percentage differential
protection that is caused by imbalance current between three phases and by CT saturation.

l Reliable CT circuit abnormity detection function

Distinguishing of open and short circuit of current transformer is more reliable due to combination
of voltage and current value method adopted.

l Flexible and self-contained backup protection for each side

Most requirements to backup protection of all sides of the transformer are provided. Each stage of

4 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 1 Instruction

relay has several time delays.

The tripping output circuit can be configured by tripping output logic setting and suitable to any
mode of tripping.

l Countermeasure against power swing in distance protection

The built-in reliable power swing blocking logic can properly supervise the distance protection
during a power swing. The power swing blocking logic can make the relay stand still for an
external fault during a power swing and pickup for an internal fault.

l Windows pattern command menu

l Convenient test and maintenance

It is very easy to test and maintain the protection equipment, especially if the dedicated test device
for RCS series protection equipment HELP-90 TESTER is used.

l Several communication ways

Four RS-485 ports electrically isolated are equipped. Two of them can be provided as optical
fiber interface optionally, the communication protocol is compatible with IEC 60870-5-103 or
IEC61850 (optional). One port is used for second/minute pulse input of clock synchronization,
and the last one is for printer and/or tester. Network shared printer can be used for printing.

In addition, one EIA (RS)232 is provided for commission on front panel of the relay.

l Perfect fault reporting and SER function

Perfect event message processing is used. Latest 32 groups of fault data and event sequence, 8
groups of fault oscillograms, 32 changes of status and 32 self-diagnose results can be recorded.

l Transformer fault record function(optional)

This recorder is an optional function provided by the equipment itself and independent of
disturbance recorder in substation. It is compatible with international COMTRADE format,
independent from protective functions in hardware and they do not influence each other.

l Convenient assistant PC software

One EIA (RS) 232 is provided for commission on front panel of the relay. Based on PC software
Windows 9X/Me/2000/NT/XP, this protection equipment will be used more conveniently.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 5


Chapter 1 Instruction

6 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

Chapter 2 Technical Data


Mechanical and environment data
Dimensions 487 mm (W) x 285 mm (D) x 353.6 mm (H, 8U)
Ambient temperature
Normal operation 0 ℃ ~ +40 ℃
Extreme range -10 ℃ ~ +50 ℃
Storage and transport -25 ℃ ~ +70 ℃

Ratings
Frequency 50 Hz / 60Hz
DC power supply 220 V, 110 V, -20%–+15%
AC voltage, Un 100 V /√3, 100V
AC current, In 5 A, 1 A
Power consumption at rated value
AC current < 1 VA / phase ( In = 5 A)
< 0.5 VA / phase ( In = 1 A)
AC voltage < 0.5 VA / phase
DC power quiescent < 50 W
energized < 70 W
Overload capability of AC current
3 x In continuously
20 x In 10 s
100 x In 1s
250 x In 1 cycle
Overload capability of AC voltage
1.5 x Un continuously

Operating time
Unrestraint differential protection ≤15 ms (1.5×setting value)
Steady state percentage differential protection ≤30 ms (2×setting value)
DPFC percentage differential protection ≤30 ms (2×setting value)
Residual percentage differential protection ≤30 ms (2×setting value)

Pick-up range of fault detector


Note: “Ie” is secondary rated current of transformer and “In” is rated secondary current of CT
herein.

Steady state percentage differential fault detector 0.1 Ie – 1.5 Ie


DPFC percentage differential fault detector 0.2 Ie
Residual percentage differential fault detector 0.1 Ie – 1.5 In
Backup phase current fault detector 0.25 A – 150 A (In = 5 A)
0.05 A– 30 A (In = 1 A)
Backup residual current fault detector 0.5 A– 20 A (In = 5 A)
0.1 A--4 A (In = 1 A)
Backup residual current fault detector 0.25 A – 150 A (In = 5 A)
0.05 A – 30 A (In = 1 A)
Backup residual overvoltage fault detector 2 V – 150 V
Backup DPFC phase-to-phase current fault detector

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 7


Chapter 2 Technical Data

0.2 In
Setting range
Unrestraint differential protection 2Ie – 14 Ie
Restraint factor of steady state percentage protection
0.2 – 0.75
Second harmonics restraint factor 0.05 – 0.35
Third harmonics restraint factor 0.05 – 0.35
Differential current for CT alarm 0.1 Ie – 1.5 Ie
Restraint factor for residual percentage differential current protection
0.2 – 0.75
Restraint factor for residual percentage differential protection per side
0.2 – 0.75
Current setting for backup protection 0.25 A – 150 A (In = 5 A )
0.05A – 30 A (In = 1 A )
Impedance setting for backup protection 0Ω – 100Ω
Voltage setting for backup protection 2 V – 100 V
Residual voltage setting for backup protection 2 V – 150 V
Overexcitation factor setting 1.0 – 1.7
Time setting of overexcitation protection 0.1 – 6000 s

Tolerance of settings
Current setting ≤ ±5%
Voltage setting ≤ ±5%
Impedance setting ≤ ±5%
Time setting ≤ 3% of setting + 40 ms
Overexcitation factor setting ≤ ±1%
Harmonic restraint factor setting ≤ ±5%
Restraint factor setting ≤ ±5%
DPFC current setting ≤ ±15%
Bound of operation range of directional unit ≤ ±3˚

Capacity of recorder
Fault recorder and fault events report
For initiation record, current and voltage waveforms within 2 cycles before and 6 cycles after
initiation will be recorded.

For tripping record, current and voltage waveforms within 2 cycles before and 6 cycles after
initiation, 2 cycles before and 6 cycles after tripping as well as those within 16 cycles during
disturbance will be recorded.

32 fault events and 8 groups of waveforms will be recorded cyclically.

Capacity of normal waveform record


All current and voltage waveforms within 5 cycles during normal operation will be recorded and
used for checking polarity.

Capacity of abnormal events record


32 abnormal alarms and 32 groups self-diagnose results will be recorded cyclically.

Abnormal alarms include self-diagnosed hardware failure, time-out of initiation of fault detector,
disagreement of initiation of two CPU on modules CPU and MONI, abnormal differential current,

8 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 2 Technical Data

abnormal residual differential current and differential current per side, CT and PT secondary
circuit failure, overload, residual overvoltage at any side, air cooling initiation, overexcitation
alarm, etc..

Capacity of change of status record


32 change of binary status will be recorded cyclically. Change of binary status includes those
of input and various fault detectors on management module.

Communication
Serial port 4×RS-485, 2 of which can be optical ports
Port for clock synchronism 1
Port for debug 1×RS-232
Port for printer 1×RS-485
Protocol IEC 60870-5-103

Clock synchronous mode


Second pulse from external free contact, or
Second signal from RS-485 interface, or
Absolute time from synchronous message of SCADA system

Capacity of output contacts


Signal contacts
Continuous making current DC 8 A
Breaking current DC 220 V, 0.3 A, L/R < 40 ms

Tripping contacts
Continuous making current DC 85A
Breaking current DC 220 V, 0.3 A, L/R < 40 ms

Other auxiliary relay contact


Continuous making current DC 5 A
Breaking current DC 220 V, 0.2 A, L/R < 40 ms

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) test


1 MHz burst disturbance test IEC 60255-22-1, class Ⅲ
Electrostatic discharge test IEC 60255-22-2, class Ⅲ
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance test IEC 60255-22-3, class Ⅲ
Fast transient disturbance test IEC 60255-22-4, class Ⅳ
Surge immunity test IEC 61000-4-5, class 4
Immunity test of conducted disturbance induced by radio frequency field
IEC 61000-4-6, class 3
Power frequency magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-8, class 4
Pulse magnetic field immunity test IEC 61000-4-9, class 3

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 9


Chapter 2 Technical Data

10 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.1 Configuration Principle for High Rated Transformer

3.1.1 Duplicated main and backup protection


Dual protection schemes are necessary for an HV-rated transformer to be safe in operation.
There are three principles for duplicating the complete set of protection schemes:

1) All protective functions of a transformer are integrated in a relay.


2) Main protection, backup protection and fail condition protection share the data sampled from
the same CT.
3) A transformer is protected by dual relays, each of which includes a complete set of
transformer protection.

With the fast development of electronic technology, especially the extensive application of DSP
(Digital Signal Processor), CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic Device) and FPGA (Field
Programmable Gate Array), it is possible to integrate main and backup protection of a main
transformer into one set of protection equipment.

Because transformer main protection don’t need communication channel as used in line pilot
protection, the backup protection can be configured simply based on enhanced main protection
by adopting above duplicate protection principle. Simple and safe overcurrent protection is a good
choice for transformer’s backup protection.

For important 220kV or above voltage level substation and high rated generator-transformer group,
duplicate independent groups of DC storage batteries for protection are provided. For some
substations and generator-transformer not quite important, although only one group of DC storage
batteries is provided considering economic factor, duplicate DC source for protection equipments
can be obtained by dividing the DC source into different DC bus bar by DC breaker. In the same
way, duplicate protection for transformer can share the same output circuit and get voltage from
different AC voltage bus bar whose voltages origin are same VT distributed by AC breaker. Of
course, it is better that independent sets of CTs are provided for the duplicated protection, one for
each. Duplicate protection configuration principle for transformer doesn’t enlarge the investment of
secondary circuit. In fact, on the contrary, the investment in protection equipment is reduced. At
least one protection will clear transformer’s inner fault, which eliminates the possibility of delay
clearance that exists before that only backup protection left when differential protection fails to
operate due to any reasons.

3.1.2 Using fault detector for security of tripping


The additional output blocking circuit controlled by general fault detectors calculated in MON
module makes the output circuit more secure, because not only the relationship between tripping
command sending and additional output blocking circuit is logic “and” in software, but also they
keeps the logic “and” relationship in hardware. It is displayed in Fig. 3.1.2.

QDJ contact is controlled by general fault detectors calculated independently in MON module.
When the contact closes, the DC source of Tripping relay is provided. The function of gate G1 is to
receive tripping commands sent from CPU module. When a tripping command arrives at the gate
G1, the driving transistor will be activated, and the trip relay’s contact will close to trip the breaker.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 11


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

+24 V QDJ
c o n tr o lle d b y
fa u lt d e te c to r +24 V
in M N G
m o d u le

trip c irc u it
re la y re s is to r
trip
c o n ta c t

trip p in g G1
1
com m ands >=1 1
tr ip p in g
fro m C P U 1 tra n s is to r
m o d u le "o r" g a te

Fig. 3.1.1 Logic relation of CPU and MON modules

The general fault detectors calculated in MON module and operation elements calculated in CPU
module use their independent data sampled by themselves, so the equipment will not operate by
mistake due to any of module’s data channel’s failure.

3.2 Fault Detector

The function of fault detectors in the MON module is to provide a supervision to the tripping
outputs. In the RCS-978E, the general fault detectors include several independent fault detectors
and each detector supervises respectively for its own operational elements and don’t affect other
operational elements. That means the current differential protection can trip only when its
respectively sensitive current differential picks up as a fault detector.
Note: The setting value of fault detectors normally should be more sensitive than the setting of
corresponding protective elements and higher than the maximum load current.

In following contents about protection operation theory, some settings mentioned may not exist in
setting table for special applications. This instruction manual is valid only for the mentioned
application-specific version of the relay, so the settings are different from a standard version.

3.2.1 Fault detector of differential currents


Criteria of this fault detector:

I dφ max > [ Diff .Pickup Curr .] (3-2-1)

where I dφ max is the maximum value of three-phase differential currents;


[ Diff .Pickup Curr .] is the setting threshold of phase differential currents.
Please refer to the settings in Chapter 6 for details. This fault detector is used to enable the
percentage current differential protection and unrestrained differential protection.

3.2.2 Fault detector of DPFC differential current


Criteria of this Fault detector:

12 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

∆I d > 1.25∆I dt + I dth


• • •
(3-2-2)
∆I d = ∆ I 1 + ∆ I 2 + ... + ∆ I m

where ∆I dt is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according
to increasing of the output of deviation component. In order to ensure that the
threshold value of voltage is slightly higher than the imbalance output, multiple 1.25
of the deviation component is reasonable.
• •
∆ I 1 …. ∆ I m are the DPFC current of each side of transformer respectively.
∆I d is the half-cycle integral value of differential current.
I dth is the fixed threshold.

This fault detector is not influenced by the direction of power flow and so it is very sensitive. The
setting is fixed and need not to be set on site. It is used to enable DPFC percentage differential
protection.

3.2.3 Fault detector of residual differential protection, etc.


This section describes fault detector of residual differential protection or common-and-serial-
windings current differential protection which are used for autotransformer only.

Criteria of residual differential current fault detector:

I d 0 > [WD PickupCurr ] (3-2-3)

Criteria of common-and-serial-windings current differential fault detector:

I dpφ max > [WD PickupCurr ] (3-2-4)

where I d 0 is the residual differential current,

I dpφ max is the differential current of HV side , MV side and common winding of auto-
transformer.

This fault detector will operate if the residual differential current or maximum value of three-phase
differential current of common-and-serial-windings is higher than the setting [WD PickupCurr ] .
For details about setting, please refer to chapter 6. This fault detector is used to enable residual
percentage differential or common-and-serial-windings differential protection.

3.2.4 Fault detector of phase current


Criteria of this fault detector:

Iφ max > [ Pickup Curr .] (3-2-5)

This fault detector will operate if maximum value of three-phases current is higher than its setting
value. It is used to enable overcurrent protection at faulty side.

3.2.5 Fault detector of calculated residual overcurrent


Criteria of this fault detector:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 13


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3I 0 > [ Pickup ZS Curr .] (3-2-6)

where 3I 0 is calculated residual current, 3I 0 = I&A + I&B + I&C .

This fault detector will operate if the residual current is higher than its setting value. It is used to
enable calculated residual current protection at relevant side.

3.2.6 Fault detector of external residual current (if available)


Criteria of this fault detector:

3I 0 > [Pickup Extern ZS Curr.] (3-2-7)

This fault detector will operate if the residual current input directly is higher than its setting value.
It is used to enable residual overcurrent protection at relevant side when the logic setting [ROC
Zone n ZSCurr Option] (if available) is set as “0”.

3.2.7 Fault detector of residual overvoltage (if available)


Criteria of this fault detector:

3U 0 > [ Pickup ZS Volt .] (3-2-8)

This fault detector will operate if the residual voltage of broken-delta connection is higher than its
setting value. It is used to enable residual overvoltage protection at relevant side.

3.2.8 Fault detector of DPFC phase-to-phase overcurrent (if available)


Criteria of this fault detector:
∆I > 1.25∆I t + I th (3-2-9)

where ∆I t is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according
to increasing of the output of deviation component. In order to ensure that the
threshold current is slightly higher than the imbalance value, multiple 1.25 of the
deviation component is reasonable.

∆I is the half-wave integral of phase-to-phase current. I th is the fixed threshold of 0.2 In


and need not to be set on site. This fault detector is used to enable the distance
protection at relevant side.

3.2.9 Fault detector of negative sequence current (if available)


Criteria of this fault detector:
I 2 > 0.2 I n (3-2-10)

This fault detector will operate if the negative sequence current is higher than 0.2 In. It is used to
enable the distance protection at relevant side.

14 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.3 Current Differential Element

3.3.1 Current differential calculation


3.3.1.1 Current compensations

By applying the Ampere-turn balance on different transformer connections, the RCS-978E relay
forms the current differential equation.

During the normal operation, the magnitude and angel of secondary currents at each side of
transformer are different due to different CT ratios and different CT connection modes. This kind
of current differentiations shall be eliminated under normal operation and compensated in fact by
a built-in compensation method.

− Calculation of rated primary current at each side of transformer:


Sn
I1n = (3-3-1)
3U 1n
where Sn is the maximum rated capacity of all windings;
U1n is the rated phase-phase voltage at the calculated side of the transformer.
l Calculation of rated secondary current at each side of transformer

I 1n
I 2n = (3-3-2)
n LH

where I1n is the rated primary current at the calculated side of transformer;
nLH is the ratio of CT at the calculated side of transformer.
l Calculation of correction coefficient of each side of transformer

I 2 n − min
K ph = × Kb , (3-3-3)
I 2n

I 2 n − max
where K b = min( , 4)
I 2 n − min

I 2 n is the rated secondary current at the calculated side;


I 2 n − min is the minimum value among the rated secondary currents of all sides;
I 2n − max is the maximum value among the rated secondary currents of all sides.
In principle, this calculation method is to use the minimum current among rated secondary
currents of all sides as the base current and the currents at other sides are considered as
multiples of the base current. If the ratio of the maximum to minimum is larger than 4, the multiple
of the maximum to minimum will be taken as 4 and other sides shall be calculated proportionally.
If the ratio of the maximum to minimum is less than 4, the multiple of the minimum rated current
shall be taken as 1, and the currents on other sides will be calculated proportionally. The
acceptable minimum coefficient is 0.25 to ensure the current differential accuracy. The
maximum setting range of current balance coefficient K ph of each side can be up to 16.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 15


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

The currents used in the following analyze have been adjusted, that means the currents are the
products of the original current of each side and its own adjustment coefficient ( K ph ).

3.3.1.2 Elimination of influence of transformer connection groups

Vectors must be transformed to construct a current differential relay for a transformer. In


traditional, the wye-connected side vectors are transformed to the delta-connected side to
eliminate vectors’ angle, which causes strong coupling between different phases that makes it
difficult to identify faulty phase when other phases have inrush current. Based on theory and lab
experiment result, a new method that transforms delta-connected side vectors to wye side was
invented to eliminate the influence mentioned above, massive on-site experiences proves that this
method is effective in practice.

Because of the variety of transformer connection groups, these differential current calculation
routines are therefore as many as there are the connection groups. The RCS-978E relay
supports five CT inputs for the differential calculation. The relay provides five settable common
connection types, including Y12 / Y12 /Y12 / Y12/ Y12 / Y12, Y12 / Y12 / Y12 / Y12 /△11/△11,
Y12 / Y12 /△11/△11/△11/△11, Y12 / Y12 /△1/△1/△1/△1, Y12 / Y12 / Y12 / Y12 /△1/△1. If
your actual transformer connection group is not included in above five groups, please let us know
before you make the order.

By defining which particular connection group the protected transformer belongs to (e.g. Yd11,
which is a power transformer setting), the proper calculation routine will applied which describes
just the specified protected power transformer.

The following transforming method is based on following assumptions:

− CTs at each side of transformer is connected in star type;


− Secondary currents of each CT are connected to the equipment directly;
− The positive polarity of CT is at busbar side;
− Polarity of each secondary winding of CT is as same as shown in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2.

The secondary current phase shift compensation for all CTs are achieved by software, iΔ→Y
transform method is used for this purpose. Thus the inrush current and fault current can be
discriminated definitely, the operating speed of protection can be accelerated. For connection
Yo/Δ-11, the correction equations are as follows:

At side Y0:

 •' • •

I A = (I A − I 0 )
 •' • •
I B = (I B − I 0 ) (3-3-4)
 •' • •
I C = ( I C − I 0 )

At side Δ:

 ' • •
I a = (I a − I c ) / 3
•
 ' • •
 I b = ( I b − I a) / 3 (3-3-5)
 '• • •
I c = (I c − I b ) / 3

16 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

• • •
where I a , I b , I c are the secondary currents of CT at side Δ;
• • •
I ' a , I ' b , I ' c are the corrected currents of each phase at side Δ;
• • •
I A , I B , I C are the secondary currents of CT at side Y0;
• • •
I ' A , I ' B , I ' C are the corrected current of each phase at side Y0.
For other connection type,the current can be calculated referring to the equations listed above.
The connection type can be selected by logic setting [Trans. Connection Mode] (refer to chapter
6 Power system parameters).

3.3.1.3 Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection

Object of unrestrained instantaneous differential protection for transformer is to accelerate the trip
speed in transformer’s inner fault. So the element do not need any block element, but the setting
should be greater than maximum inrush current.

The pickup of unrestrained differential elements in the RCS-978E shall trip all breakers at all sides
of a transformer when any unrestrained phase differential current is larger than its setting value.

3.3.1.4 Characteristic of percentage differential protection

Following analysis is based on the assumption that ratio and phase shift compensation have been
done.

The percentage differential protection is used to distinguish that the differential current is caused
by imbalance output or fault (internal fault and special external fault). Following criteria are used
for percentage differential protection:

I d > 0.2 I r + I cdqd I r ≤ 0.5 I e


I > K b1 [I r − 0.5I e ] + 0.1I e + I cdqd 0.5I e ≤ I r ≤ 6 I e
 d
I d > 0.75[I r − 6 I e ] + K b1 [5.5I e ] + 0.1I e + I cdqd I r > 6I e

 1 m (3-3-6)
I r = ∑ Ii
2 i =1
 m
I
 d
= ∑I
i =1
i

I d > 0.6[ I r − 0.8 I e ] + 1.2 I e


 (3-3-7)
I r > 0.8 I e

where I e is the rated current of transformer;


I i (i = 1 … m) are currents at sides 1 – m of transformer respectively;
I cdqd is the pickup value of steady state percentage differential protection, in setting table it
is expressed as [Diff. Pickup Curr.].
I d is the differential current;
I r is the restraint current;
kbl is setting value of percentage restraint coefficient, 0.2 ≤ k bl ≤0.75, 0.5 is preferred.
It is expressed as [Diff. Stabilizing Factor] in setting table.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 17


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Fig. 3.3.1 shows characteristic of steady state percentage differential relay.

operating current
operation area without
TA saturation
discrimination

saturation discrimination
operation area with TA
1.2 Ie

Icdqd
restraint current
0.5 Ie 0.8 Ie 6 Ie

Fig. 3.3.1 Characteristic of percentage differential relay

Discrimination of percentage differential protection is carried on per phase and the equipment will
operate if the equation mentioned above is satisfied.

Protective function described in (3-3-6) will send tripping command after CT saturation, CT circuit
failure (optional) and inrush current have been excluded. It can ensure sensitivity of protection
and avoid unwanted operation when CT is saturated during external fault.

Protection function described in (3-3-7) will send tripping command only after CT circuit failure
(optional) and inrush current have been excluded. It eliminates influence of transient and steady
saturation of CT during external fault and ensures reliable operation even if CT is saturated during
internal fault by means of its percentage restraint characteristic.

3.3.2 Influence factors and countermeasures


3.3.2.1 Inrush current

l Discrimination of inrush current by harmonics

In RCS-978 series protection equipment, the second and third harmonics of differential current
can be used to distinguish inrush current. Its criteria are:

 I 2 nd > K 2 xb * I1st
 (3-3-8)
 I 3rd > K 3 xb * I1st
where I 2 nd and I 3rd is the second and third harmonics of all phase differential current.
I1st is the differential fundamental current of corresponding phase.
k 2 xb and k3 xb are the setting values of restraint coefficient of second and third harmonics
respectively, k 2 xb = 0.15 and k3 xb = 0.2 is recommended. In main protection setting
table, they are expressed as [2nd Harm. Stab. Factor] and [3rd Harm. Stab. Factor]
respectively.

When one of three-phases current is distinguished as inrush current, the percentage differential

18 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

protection of this and only this phase will be blocked, i.e. no “cross block” philosophy is used in this
relay.

l Discrimination of inrush current by waveform distortion

The differential current is basically the fundamental sinusoidal wave during fault. When the
transformer is energized plentiful harmonics will appear, the waveform will be distorted, interrupted
and unsymmetrical. A special algorithm can be used for discrimination of the inrush current.

Following expression is used:


S > k b * S +
 (3-3-9)
 S > St
where S is the full cycle intergral of differential current;
kb is a fixed constant and differential current;
S + is full cycle intergral of the sum of instantaneous value of differential current and that
half cycle before;
S t is a threshold value which can be represented as follows:
S t = α * I d + 0.1* I e (3-3-10)

where I d is the full cycle intergral of differential current;


α is a proportional constant;
I e is the rated current of transformer.
If any one of three phases cannot meet above equation, the current can be considered as inrush
current and percentage differential relay will be blocked.

In this protection equipment, logic setting [Inrush Blk Diff] is provided for user to select the
restraint blocking principle. If the logic setting is set as “0”, discrimination by harmonics is
enabled; If it is set as “1”, discrimination by waveform distortion is enabled.

3.3.2.2 CT saturation

In order to prevent unwanted operation of steady state percentage differential protection caused
by transient or steady state saturation of CT during external fault, second and third harmonics of
secondary current of CT are used for the protection equipment to discriminate saturation of CT.
The expression is as following:

 Iφ 2 > kφ 2 xb * Iφ 1
 (3-3-11)
 Iφ 3 > kφ 3 xb * Iφ 1

where I φ 2 is the second harmonics of phase current;


Iφ 3 is the third harmonics of phase current;
Iφ 1 is the fundamental component of phase current;
kφ 2 xb is fixed coefficient.
kφ 3 xb is fixed coefficient.
If any harmonic of a current related to phase differential current meets expression (3-3-11), it will
be considered that CT saturation causes this phase differential current and related steady state
percentage differential relay will be blocked. This criterion is enabled when the transformer is in
operation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 19


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.3.2.3 High setting percentage differential protection

A percentage differential protection with high percentage and high setting is equipped with the
equipment to prevent delayed operation of percentage differential protection caused by CT
saturation and other coefficient s during serious internal fault. This protection is blocked only by
criterion of second harmonic of differential current or waveform discrimination. It can prevent
influence of steady state and transient CT saturation during external fault and can operate
correctly and quickly during internal fault even if CT is saturated. Operation criterion of this high
setting percentage differential protection is (3-3-8), and listed here again.
I d > 0.6[ I r − 0.8 I e ] + 1.2 I e
 (3-3-12)
I r > 0.8 I e
The following figure shows operation characteristic of this protection. The operation area in
following figure is same to the shadow part of fig. 3.3.1.
unrestraint
Id operation area
Icdsd

operation
area 0.70

1.2Ie

0 Ir
Fig. 3.3.2 Operation characteristic of steady state high setting percentage differ-
rential protection

When fault occurs, the operation criterion will be discriminated phase by phase and percentage
differential protection will operate if the criterion is met.

Parameters of this protection are fixed when delivered and need not to be set by the user. This
function has been shown in (3-3-8).

3.3.2.4 Countermeasures against imbalance differential current caused by clearance of


external fault removal

When calculating restraint current, floating threshold technique is applied, the floating threshold
will go up quickly and down slowly along with the imbalance current with a time delay. In this
way, maloperations of differential protection resulting from CT transient and steady saturation
during external fault clearance are avoided.

3.3.2.5 Distinguishing CT circuits failure from fault

The CT circuit failure falls into two categories: CT circuit failure without differential relay pickup and
that with differential relay pickup.

l CT circuit failure without differential relay pickup

If the differential current in any phase is higher than its alarm setting I bj _ set [Diff. CT Superv.
Alarm] and lasts for longer than 10 s, differential current abnormal alarm will be sent without
blocking the protection. CT circuit failure alarm will be issued without blocking the protection. The
setting shall be higher than maximum differential current caused by adjustment of tap-changer or
by other conditions.

20 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

l Alarm for CT circuit failure with differential relay pickup

If any one of the following conditions appears after differential relay pickup, it will be considered as
a fault and the differential relay will be enabled. If neither following condition appears when
differential relay pickup, it will be considered as CT circuit failure.

− Any phase-to-phase DPFC voltage relay at any side of transformer picks up;
− Negative phase voltage at any side is higher than 6 V;
− Any phase current on any side 1ncreases;
− The maximum phase current is higher than 1.1 Ie, where Ie is the related current of
transformer.

By means of the logic setting [CT Superv. Blk Diff.], the differential current abnormality that
causes pickup of differential protection has the following consequences:

If this logic setting is set as “0”, the percentage differential protection, residual differential
protection and common-and-serial-windings differential protection will not be blocked by CT circuit
failure.

If this logic setting is set as “1”, the percentage differential protection expressed by (3-3-6),
residual differential protection and common-and-serial-windings differential protection will be
blocked but the percentage differential protection expressed by (3-3-7) will not be blocked by CT
circuit failure.

If this logic setting is set as “2”, the percentage differential protection, residual differential
protection and common-and-serial-windings differential protection will be blocked by CT circuit
failure.

The DPFC percentage differential relay is always blocked by CT circuit failure.

Discrimination of CT circuit failure in differential scheme is very accurate and reliable due to
criteria mentioned above in which both values of voltage and current are considered for the
discrimination simultaneously.
Note: CT circuit failure, no matter whether the differential relay picks up or not, indicates abnormality
in differential schemes or settings. Both these abnormalities shall be paid attention on site. For
example, differential circuits open can not cause protection pickup in case of light load but
alarm will be issued. If this abnormality is fixed in time, unwanted differential operation when
the load increases or external fault occurs can be avoided.

3.3.2.6 Discrimination of overexcitation

When a transformer is overexcited, the exciting current will increase sharply which may result in
unwanted operation of differential protection. Therefore the overexcitation shall be discriminated
to block the current differential protection. The fifth harmonic of differential current is used as
criterion of overexcitation discrimination.

I 5th > k5 xb * I1st (3-3-14)

where I 1st is fundamental component of differential current;


I 5th is the fifth harmonics of differential current;
k5 xb is the fifth harmonics restraint coefficient, fixed at 35%.
Overexcitation effect can be expressed by overexcitation coefficient which is defined as the ratio of
per unit values of voltage and frequency. When the overexcitation coefficient is higher than 1.4,
the differential protection will be no longer blocked by overexcitation

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 21


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.4 DPFC Current Differential Element

Based on the deviation of current, DPFC percentage differential protection provides a sensitive
protection for the transformer, especially under the heavy load condition comparing with the
steady state percentage restraint differential relay.

3.4.1 Operation characteristic of DPFC


The operation criteria of DPFC percentage differential are as follows:

∆I d > 1.25 * ∆I dt + I dth



∆I d > 0.6 * ∆I r ∆I r < 2 I e (3-4-1)
∆I > 0.75 * ∆I − 0.3 * I ∆I r > 2 I e
 d r e

where ∆I r is the restraint current, it is the maximum current among the restraint current of three
phases, ∆I r = max{ ∆I1φ + ∆I 2φ + .... + ∆I mφ } ( φ = A, B, C )
• • •
∆I d is the DPFC differential current, ∆I d = ∆ I 1 + ∆ I 2 + .... + ∆ I m
∆I dt is the floating threshold value which will arise automatically and gradually according
to increasing of output of deviation component. In order to ensure that the threshold
value is slightly higher than the imbalance output, multiple 1.25 of the deviation
component is reasonable and the unwanted operation of relays will not occur during
power swing or power frequency deviating.
• •
∆ I 1φ … ∆ I mφ are DPFC phase currents on each side of transformer.
I dth is the fixed threshold value of current.
Ie is the secondary rated current of transformer.
Note: Calculation of restraint current of DPFC percentage differential protection is different from the
steady state percentage differential protection, it is difficult to test this function on site, so we
recommend qualitative function test only on site.

Fig. 3.4.1 shows operating characteristic of DPFC percentage differential protection.


operating current

0.75

0.6
0.2 Ie
restraint current
2 Ie

Fig. 3.4.1 Operating characteristic of DPFC percentage differential protection

The criteria are checked phase by phase. If the criterion mentioned above is met, the DPFC
percentage differential protection will operate. Tripping command will be issued by control of

22 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

inrush current and overexcitation discrimination.

This protective element has high ability to eliminate the effect of transient and steady saturation of
CT during the external fault because the restraint coefficient is set at a higher value.

3.4.2 Influence and countermeasure of DPFC differential protection


In order to avoid bad influences (for examples, inrush, over-excitation, CT circuit abnormality) to
DPFC differential protection, similar countermeasures are used in DPFC characteristic. Please
refer to 3.3.2.1—3.3.2.5 for details.

3.5 Residual Differential Protection, etc.

Residual differential protection and common-and-serial-windings (discussed later) are mainly used
for autotransformer. They are based on differential of HV side current, MV side current and
common winding current of autotransformer. The differences between overall percentage
differential protection or common-and-serial-windings differential protection is that the former is
based on ampere-turn balance while the later is based on the First Kirchhoff’s Law(i.e. sum of all
current entering one electrical node is equal to zero).

3.5.1 Characteristic of residual differential protection


3.5.1.1 Currents adjustment of each side to standard side

Amplitudes of secondary current of CT at each side of transformer are different because current
ratio of various CT is different on these sides. This effect shall be eliminated for normal operation
of protection and it can be corrected in fact by software design of digital transformer protection
equipment. Here is the method of eliminating the effect used for residual differential protection in
RCS-978 series transformer protection equipment.
KTA
K ph = × Kb (3-5-1)
KTA _ max

KTA − max
where K b = min( , 4)
KTA − min

K TA is the CT ratio at calculated side;


KTA _ min is the minimum CT ratio among all side;
KTA _ max is the maximum CT ratio among all side;
This calculation method is based on taking the minimum among rated secondary current of all
sides as the basis and other side will be considered as its multiples. If ratio of the maximum CT
ratio to minimum CT ratio is larger than 4, the multiple of the maximum to minimum will be taken as
4 and other side will be calculated proportionally. If ratio of the maximum to minimum is less than 4,
the multiple of the minimum rated current will be taken as 1, and other side will be calculated
proportionally. Thus the maximum setting range of current balance coefficient K ph of each side
can be up to 4.

The currents used in the following analyze are based on the assumption that they have been
adjusted, that means the currents are the products of original current of each side and its own
adjustment coefficient ( K ph ).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 23


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.5.1.2 Characteristic of residual differential protection

Criteria is as follows:

 I 0 d > I 0 cdqd I 0 r ≤ 0.5 I n


 I > K [I − 0.5 I ] + I
 0d 0 b1 0 r n 0 cdqd

 I 0 r = max{ I 01 , I 02 , I 0 cw } (3-5-2)
 • • •
 I 0 d = I 01 + I 02 + I 0 cw

where I 01 , I 02 and I 0 cw are residual currents of side 1, side 2 and common winding
respectively;
I 0cdqd is the pick up value of residual percentage differential protection [REF Pickup Curr.].
I 0 d is the residual different current.
I 0 r is the restraint current.
K 0b1 is restraint coefficient.
Fig. 3.5.1 shows operated characteristic of residual differential protection.
operating current

kobl

Iocdqd
restraint current
0.5 In

Fig. 3.5.1 Operating characteristic of residual percentage differential protection

3.5.2 Influences and countermeasures of residual protection

l Polarity of CT circuits used in the protection

Internally calculated residual current is used in residual differential protection to avoid


maloperation resulting from wrong polarity of CT.

l Inrush or sympathetic inrush current influence

Because the current balance is based on the First Kirchhoff’s Law, the inrush and sympathetic
inrush current has no influence to residual differential protection or common-and-serial-winding
differential protection.

l CT saturation or CT transient characteristic

Difference of transient characteristic and saturation of CT will result in erroneous residual current
in differential scheme during external three-phase short circuit fault. In order to eliminate effect of
it, positive sequence current restraint blocking criterion and CT saturation criterion are used.

24 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Positive sequence current restraint principle can be expressed as following:

I 0 > β 0 * I1 (3-5-3)

where I 0 is the residual current at a side;


I1 is its corresponding positive sequence current; and
β 0 is a fixed coefficient.
3.5.3 Characteristic of common-and-serial-windings differential protection
Its operating expression is as follows

I d > I fcdqd I r ≤ 0.5I n


I > K fb1 [I r − 0.5 I n ] + I fcdqd
 d
I r = max{ I1 , I 2 , I cw } (3-5-4)
 • • •
I d = I 1 + I 2 + I cw


where I 1 , I 2 and I cw are currents in side 1, side 2 and common winding respectively;
I fcdqd is the pick up value of common-and-serial-windings differential protection, equal to
[REF Pickup Curr.];
I d is the differential current;
I r is the differential restraint current;
k fbl is the setting value of common-and-serial-windings differential percentage restraint
coefficient, expressed as [REF Stabilizing Factor], k fbl = 0.5 is recommended.
In is the rated secondary current of CT.

These criteria are phase-segregated; Magnitude ratio balance of the CT secondary current at
each side is adjusted by software.

If the pick up value I fcdqd > 0.5 I n , its knee point current will be set at I n automatically, the
operating equation is as follows:

I fd > I fcdqd I r ≤ In
I > K [I − I ] + I Ir > In
 d fb1 r n fcdqd

I r = max{ I1 , I 2 , I cw } (3-5-5)
 • • •
I d = I 1 + I 2 + I cw


Fig. 3.5.2 shows operating characteristic of common-and-serial-windings percentage differential


protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 25


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

operating current
kfbl

Ifcdqd
restraint current
0.5 In

Fig. 3.5.2 Operating characteristic of common-and-serial-windings percentage


differential protection

3.5.4 Alarm or blocking of CT circuit failure


l Alarm without pickup of differential relay

If residual differential current or common-and-serial-windings differential current is higher than its


alarm setting and lasts for longer than 10 s, alarm of residual differential current or common-and-
serial-windings differential current will be issued while the protection will not be blocked.

l Alarm with pickup of differential relay

Discrimination method is the same as percentage differential protection.

The residual differential protection or common-and-serial-windings differential protection can be


blocked or not blocked when CT circuit failure, which can be selected by corresponding logic
setting. (Refer to parameter setting part in chapter 6 for details.)

3.6 Directional Overcurrent Protection Controlled by Composite

Voltage

3.6.1 Summary of application


The function of overcurrent backup protection for a transformer is to avoid some physical
damages due to long time through-fault current. Directional overcurrent can be optionally applied
to overcurrent protection to control the operation stage of it as either positive or reverse direction
to the transformer. Composite voltage control function improves the sensitivity of overcurrent
protection because the setting can be set much smaller without worrying about unwanted
operation for some special conditions such as the motor self-starting.

Settings are provided for composite voltage element for the user to choose certain sensitivity.
Besides overcurrent protection, inverse-time overcurrent protection is also provided in RCS-978
equipment to take advantage of the overload capabilities of transformer mostly. Detail parameters
setting method is provided in chapter 6.

3.6.1.1 Time overcurrent protection

Overcurrent protection is used as backup protection of phase-to-phase faults in transformer.

26 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Following functions of any stage of overcurrent relay can be selected by logic setting:

− Whether be controlled by composite voltage or not;


− Whether be controlled by directional relay or not;
− Whether be enabled or disabled;
− Breaker(s) on what side or sides will be tripped.
3.6.1.2 Inverse time-finite overcurrent protection

In order to coordinate with line protection, the same inverse-time overcurrent protection is
equipped in this relay. IEC curve A of normal IDMT (inverse definite minimum time) characteristic
defined in IEC 60255-3 is adopted in this protection. Fig. 3.6.1 shows the inverse time curve.
In the figure, t min is the definite minimum time and I szd is lower limit setting of the protection
[InvTime OC Curr.].

Ih

Iszd

tmin tmax
Fig. 3.6.1 Operation characteristic of IDMT overcurrent

Operation criterion of inverse time part:

0.14
t(I ) = TP (3-6-1)

( ) 0.02
−1
I SZD

where I SZD is lower limit setting of the protection [InvTime OC Curr.];


Tp is delay of inverse time overcurrent protection [InvTime OC Delay];
Iϕ is phase current.
Inverse time overcurrent protection consists of three parts: low setting initiator, inverse time part
and upper limit definite time part. Please refer to chapter 6 for detail of relevant parameter setting.
Inverse time part can simulate transformer-heating process including heat accumulation and
dissipation. When phase current reaches its lower limit setting [InvTime OC Curr.], inverse time
part picks up and the heat is accumulated. When the current is lower than rated value [InvTime
OC Curr.], the heat dissipation will be simulated accordingly.

3.6.2 Directional overcurrent protection


Positive sequence voltage memory polarization is used in directional relay. There is no dead
stage for directional relay during close-in three-phase short circuit fault due to its memory function.
The directional relay is connected in naught degree mode. The polarity of CT connected to
protection equipment is shown in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2 or in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2. The positive

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 27


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

polarity shall be on the side near busbar.

Each stage of backup overcurrent protection can be set separately by corresponding logic setting
[OC Direction Option] to control its direction. If the [OC Direction Option] is set as “1”, its
direction points to transformer and reach angle is 45º. If the [OC Direction Option] is set as “0”,
its direction points to power system and reach angle is 225º. The operating characteristic is
shown in Fig. 3.10 where the hatched area is operation stage. Meanwhile logic setting [OC Zone
Blk by Direction] can be set for each stage of overcurrent protection to be controlled by direction
element. If [OC Zone Blk by Direction] is set as “1”, the overcurrent relay will be controlled by
directional element.

Ul Ul

φlm =45°
φlm=225°

a) Point to transformer b) Point to power system

Fig. 3.6.2 Operating characteristic of phase-to-phase directional relay

Note: The direction mentioned above is based on the assumption that the positive polarity is at the
side of busbar. The details are shown in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2.

3.6.3 Overcurrent protection with composite voltage element control

The composite voltage element is an element which will operate if phase-to-phase voltage is lower
than its setting value or negative sequence voltage is higher than its setting value. For composite
voltage element at one side of transformer, composite voltage of other side can be adopted as its
criteria. For example, for backup protection at side 1, some logic settings such as [OC Zone n
Blk by Volt on side2] is used to select whether the overcurrent protection to be blocked by
composite voltage at side 2 when the composite voltage element does not operate. If this logic
setting is set as “1”, overcurrent protection will be blocked by it. If this logic setting is set as “0”, the
overcurrent protection will not be blocked by it. Such logic settings are provided for every stage of
overcurrent protection.

3.6.4 Effects of VT fail on composite voltage element and directional relay


Logic setting [VT Supervision Criterion] is used to control performance of directional relay and
composite voltage element during VT circuit failure. If [VT Supervision Criterion] is set as “1”,
when VT circuit failure at one side 1 is detected, directional relay and composite voltage element
at the same side will be disabled but overcurrent relay on the same side can still be controlled by
composite voltage elements of other side 1f corresponding logic setting is set as “1”. If [VT
Supervision Criterion] is set as “0”, when VT circuit failure at one side 1 is detected, the
overcurrent relay will become an overcurrent relay without directional element and composite
voltage element control.

28 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

No matter the logic setting is set as “0” or “1”, VT circuit failure on one side will not lead to the
operation of the composite voltage element at the same side to control overcurrent relay at other
sides.

3.6.5 Effects of local side VT disabled on composite voltage and direction


When VT on one side is under maintenance or bus-tie breaker is used for the transformer but its
VT has not been switched over to the protection equipment, in order to ensure correct operation of
directional overcurrent relay with composite voltage control, the binary input or logic setting
“voltage at local side disabled” shall be set on. Effects on composite voltage element and
directional relay at local side at this time are as follows:

− The composite voltage element of local side is disabled, but local protection can still be
controlled by composite voltage element of other side if corresponding logic setting is set as
“1”.
− The directional relay will not control this relay;
− The composite voltage element at local side will not control overcurrent relay at other sides
even if corresponding logic setting is set as “1”.

3.7 Residual Overcurrent Protection

3.7.1 Summary of application


3.7.1.1 Time residual overcurrent protection

Residual overcurrent relay is mainly used as backup protection of earth fault for transformer with
neutral point earthed solidly. Following functions of any stage of this protection can be selected by
setting logic settings:

− Whether be controlled by directional relay or not;


− Whether be controlled by residual voltage or not;
− Whether be controlled by harmonics or not;
− Whether or not be enabled or disabled;
− Breaker(s) at what side or sides will be tripped.

3.7.1.2 Inverse time residual overcurrent protection

In order to coordinate with line residual overcurrent protection, the same inverse-time residual
overcurrent protection is equipped in this relay. IEC curve A of normal IDMT (inverse definite
minimum time) characteristic defined in IEC 60255-3 is adopted in this protection. Fig. 3.7.1
shows the inverse time curve. In the figure, t min is the definite minimum time and I szd is lower
limit setting of the protection [InvTime ROC Curr.].

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 29


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Ih

Iszd

tmin tmax
Fig. 3.7.1 Operation characteristic of IDMT residual overcurrent protection

Operation criterion of inverse time part:

0.14
t ( I0 ) = TP
I 0 0.02
( ) −1
I SZD

where I SZD is lower limit setting of the protection [InvTime ROC Curr.];
Tp is delay of inverse time overcurrent protection [InvTime ROC Delay];
I 0 is residual current.
Inverse time residual overcurrent protection consists of three parts: low setting initiator, inverse
time part and upper limit definite time part. Please refer to chapter 6 for details of relevant
parameter setting. Inverse time part can simulate transformer-heating process including heat
accumulation and dissipation. When residual current reaches its low setting I szd , inverse time part
picks up and the heat is accumulated. When the stator current is lower than rated value, the
heat dissipation will be simulated accordingly.

3.7.2 Directional Residual current


3.7.2.1 Residual current used by directional relay

Logic setting [ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir.] (if available) is used to select what residual current is
used by directional relay. If the logic setting is set as “1”, internally calculated sequence current is
used for this relay. If the logic setting is set as “0”, directly measured residual current is used.

3.7.2.2 Directional control of residual overcurrent protection

Logic setting [ROC Direction Opt] is used to select the direction of every stage of residual
overcurrent protection. If this logic setting is set as “1”, the direction is transformer and reach
angle is 225º. If this logic setting is set as “0”, the direction is power system and reach angle is
75º. Fig. 3.12 shows operating characteristic of directional protection where the hatched area is
operation zone.

In addition, logic setting [ROC Zone n Blk by Direction] is used to select whether residual
overcurrent relay is controlled by directional relay. If this logic setting is set as “1”, residual
overcurrent protection will be controlled by directional relay.

30 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

Io

φ 3U 0 φ 3U0
lm=75° lm=255°

Io

a) Direct to transformer b) Direct to power system

Fig. 3.7.2 Operating characteristic of residual directional protection

Note: The residual voltage used by directional relay is definitely the calculated voltage. The
direction mentioned above is based on the assumption that positive polarity of CT being at the
side of busbar and positive polarity of CT at neutral point being at the side of transformer. The
details are shown in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2.

3.7.2.3 Residual current used by residual overcurrent relay

Logic setting [ROC Zone n ZSCurr Option] (if available) is used to select what residual current is
used by stage 1 and 2 of residual overcurrent relay. If the logic setting is set as “1”, internally
calculated residual current is used for these two stages. If it is set as “0”, directly measured
residual current is used.

As to stage 3 of residual overcurrent relay, it uses definitely the directly measured residual current.

3.7.2.4 Residual voltage element

Logic setting [ROC Zone n Blk by ZSVolt] (if available) is used to select whether residual
overcurrent relay will be controlled by residual voltage element. If the logic setting is set as “1”,
it will be controlled by residual voltage element.

Residual voltage element uses definitely the internally calculated residual voltage.

3.7.2.5 Harmonics blocking

In order to prevent effects of sympathetic inrush current on residual overcurrent relay, harmonics
blocking function can be set for every stage of this relay, i.e., the overcurrent relay can be blocked
if harmonics reaches its setting. If logic setting [ROC Zone n Blk by Harm] is set as “1”, stage n of
residual overcurrent will be blocked by harmonics element.

3.7.2.6 Effects of VT failure on residual voltage element and residual directional relay

Logic setting [VT Supervision Criterion] is used to control performance of residual directional
relay and residual voltage element during VT circuit failure. If this logic setting is set as “1”, when
VT circuit failure at local side is detected, residual overcurrent relay will be blocked. If it is set as
“0”, when VT circuit failure at one side 1 is detected, residual overcurrent relay become a
overcurrent relay without directional element and voltage element control.

3.7.2.7 Effects of local side VT out-of-service on residual directional overcurrent relay


controlled by residual voltage element

When VT on one side is under maintenance or bus-tie breaker is used for the transformer but its

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 31


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

VT has not been switched over to the protection equipment, in order to ensure correct operation of
residual directional overcurrent relay controlled by residual voltage, the binary input or logic setting
[VT Out of Service] on local side shall be set on. Effects on residual directional relay controlled by
residual voltage element at local side at this time are as follows:

Residual voltage element will not block residual directional relay;

The directional relay will not control this relay.

3.8 Overexcitation Volts/Hz Protection

Overexcitation protection is used to prevent transformer damage due to excessive voltage


possibly in combined with below-normal frequency. Degree of overexcitation can be evaluated by
following overexcitation coefficient:

n = U* / f* (3-8-1)

where U * and f * are per unit value of voltage and frequency respectively. During normal
operation, n = 1.

Two definite time delays and one inverse time delay for tripping and one stage for alarm are
equipped with overexcitation protection. Inverse time overexcitation protection realizes inverse
time characteristic by linear processing on given inverse time operation characteristic, obtaining
multiple of overexcitation by calculation, and getting corresponding operation delay by sectional
linear insertion. The heat accumulation and dissipation are simulated in this relay.

Up to ten groups of settings can be configured for the inverse time characteristics and this
protection can suit overexcitation requirements of different transformers.

Fig. 3.8.1 shows inverse time characteristic of overexcitation protection.

As damage of overexcitation to transformer is mainly part overheat, so concept of “RMS value” is


used to calculate overexcitation coefficient n, i.e.,

n (t )dt
1 T 2
T ∫0
n= (3-8-2)

where T is the time from beginning of overexcitation to the instant of calculation;


n(t) is overexcitation calculation coefficient which is a function with time as the variant.
n
upper limit

lower limit

t(s)

Fig. 3.8.1 Inverse time characteristic of overexcitation protection

Obviously, the overexcitation calculation coefficient reflects overexcitation information from its
beginning up to present.

Inverse time characteristic is defined by 10 overexcitaion coefficients settings n0 – n9 and

32 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

associated time delay t0-t9. The overexcitaion multiple settings n (= U/F) are within range of 1.1
– 1.7. Maximum time delay t is considered as long as 3000 s. Relation between settings of n
and t are:

n0 ≥ n1 ≥ n2 ≥ n3 ≥ n4 ≥ n5 ≥ n6 ≥ n7 ≥ n8 ≥ n9
t0 ≤ t1 ≤ t2 ≤ t3 ≤ t4 ≤ t5 ≤ t6 ≤ t7 ≤ t8 ≤ t9

3.9 Phase-to-Phase Distance Protection

3.9.1 Summary of application


Phase-to-phase distance protection is used as backup protection of phase-to-phase fault in
transformer. Following functions of this protection can be selected by logic settings:

− What direction it will point to;


− Whether it will be enabled or disabled;
− Breaker(s) at what side or sides will be tripped.

The distance characteristic circle can be chosen from a mho relay, an offset mho or impedance
relay by setting.

3.9.2 Operation theory of distance protection (optional)


Polarities of CTs connected are shown in Fig. 1.2.1 or Fig. 1.2.2 where the positive polarity is on
the bus side. All settings associated with direction are based on this assumption. A logic setting
[Distance Protection Direction] of backup protection of side 1 and 2 is used to control direction
of distance protection. When this logic setting is set as “1”, it points to transformer, while “0” to
system.

Fig 3.9.1 shows operating characteristic of distance relay with reach angle 75º. In this figure, Zn
is the reverse impedance setting and Zp the forward impedance setting.

jx
Zp

ϕm
R

Zn

Fig. 3.9.1 Operating characteristic of distance relay

Operation criterion of distance relay is


• •
(U − I Z P )
90 < Arg
o
• •
< 270o (3-9-1)
(U + I Z n )
DPFC of phase-to-phase current and negative sequence current are used for fault detector of
distance protection. The protection will be enabled for 500 ms since the fault detector picks up and
will hold on if the distance relay operates. Pick-up values of the fault detectors are:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 33


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

∆I > 1.25∆I t + I th
(3-9-2)
I 2 > 0.2 I n
where ∆I t is floating threshold which will increase as the DPFC increases. The multiple 1.25
ensures that the threshold is always higher than imbalance and the protection will not
mal-operate during power swing and frequency fluctuating.

I th is the fixed threshold which is equal to 0.2 In.


I 2 is negative sequence current.
3.9.3 Blocking during power swing
In order to avoid unwanted operation of distance relay, it will be blocked during power swing.
However, the blocking will be removed in following three cases.

3.9.3.1 Blocking removed after pickup of fault detector

When the fault detector picks up, if the positive sequence overcurrent element which setting is
higher than the maximum load current does not operate yet or it operates but lasts for less than 10
ms, the blocking will be removed immediately for 160 ms.

3.9.3.2 Blocking removed in case of unsymmetrical fault

The blocking will be removed in case of unsymmetrical fault by unsymmetrical component element
with the following criterion:

I 0 + I 2 > m × I1 (3-9-3)

Value of m is a fixed constant which is chosen with sufficient margin so that the distance relay will
be blocked in the worst power swing with or without external fault. I 1 , I 2 and I 0 are positive,
negative and residual of current respectively.

This function ensures that internal unsymmetrical fault can be cleared during power swing and the
protection can be blocked during power swing with or without external fault.

3.9.3.3 Blocking removed in case of symmetrical fault

If three-phase fault occurs 160ms later after pickup of fault detector or during power swing,
blocking cannot be removed by measures mentioned above. An additional symmetrical fault
element is equipped especially for this case.

This element is based on measuring voltage at power swing center:

U OS = U 1 × cos Φ1 (3-9-4)

where φ1 is the angle between positive sequence current and voltage;


U1 is the positive sequence voltage.

From Fig. 3.9.2, if phase angle between electromotive force (EMF) of both ends E M and E N is
90°, the current will be perpendicular to the line connecting ends of E M and E N . This current
is in phase with voltage at the swing center.

During normal system operation or power swing, U 1 × cos Φ1 is exactly the positive sequence
voltage at the swing center.

34 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

During three-phase fault, suppose phase angle of the system is 90°, U 1 × cos Φ1 is voltage drop
on arc resistance. This voltage drop is generally less than 5%×Un. The actual line distance
angle is not 90°and could be compensated as shown in Fig. 3.9.3

In Fig. 3.9.3, OD or U is the measured voltage which is actually equal to positive sequence voltage
U 1, U 1 × cos Φ1 = OB, so OB is equivalent to voltage drop on the arc resistance when the
system impedance angle is 90°. The actual voltage drop on arc resistance is OA. OA and voltage
drop on the line AD could be added and then get the measured voltage U.

I
EM U EN
UOS

Φ1

Fig. 3.9.2 Vector diagram of system voltage

U
D

O Φ1 A
I
θ B
C

Fig. 3.9.3 Vector diagram of short circuit current and voltage

A compensated angle θ is introduced, θ=90-ΦL, where ΦL is impedance angle of line/transformer,


Let Φ=Φ1+θ, then U OS = U cos Φ. During three-phase short circuit, U OS = OC ≤ OA , so
U cos Φ could represent voltage drop on arc resistance.
Criterion here comprises following two parts. If the criterion is met, the distance relay will be
enabled with certain time delay.

1) − 0.03U N < U OS < 0.08U N with time delay 150 ms.


2) − 0.1U N < U OS < 0.25U N with time delay 500 ms.
Note: If time delay of distance protection is more than 1.5 s, power swing blocking is not needed. A
logic setting [distance protection blocked by oscillation] is used for that. If this logic setting is
set as “1” the blocking is enabled, and “0” disabled.

3.9.4 Effect of VT circuit failure on distance protection


When VT circuit failure is detected, the distance protection will be disabled automatically and
depending on corresponding logic setting, replaced by a special overcurrent protection
automatically. This overcurrent protection will trip circuit breakers of each side of the transformer.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 35


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

When VT used by the distance protection is maintained or bus-tie circuit breaker is used and
relevant VT has not been switched over, in order to avoid unwanted operation of distance
protection, associated binary input or logic setting [VT Out of Service] shall be set on. Then the
distance protection will be disabled. An overcurrent protection stage can be enabled by logic
setting as mentioned above.

3.10 Ground Overcurrent Protection, etc. for Transformer Earthed

via Air Gap

Ground air gap overcurrent and residual overvoltage protection with one stage and two time
delays are equipped with the equipment as backup protection for transformer fault with neutral
point earthed via air gap. Operation of such ground air gap overcurrent and residual overvoltage
relay will be extended for 20 ms and delay timer will start after the extension.

Considering that ground air gap overcurrent and residual overvoltage may appear alternatively
when air gap is broken down, it is better to OR the operation of ground air gap overcurrent and
residual overvoltage, thus the logic setting [’gap’ protection mode] is provided. If this logic setting
is set as “1”, residual overvoltage and overcurrent relay will be ORed. At this time, time setting
and logic setting of ground air gap overcurrent protection is also applied to residual overvoltage
protection。

3.11 Residual Overvoltage Protection on LV Side

Since LV side of transformer is usually unearthed, one stage residual overvoltage relay is
equipped with the equipment for protection of earth fault at LV side of the transformer.

3.12 VT and CT Circuit Failure

3.12.1 VT circuit failure detection


Criteria of VT circuit failure detection are as following:

− Positive sequence voltage is lower than 30 V and any phase current is higher than 0.04In or
the breaker is in closed position, where In is nominal secondary current of CT;
− The negative sequence voltage is higher than 8 V.

If either criterion is met and fault detector of protection has not picked up, VT circuit failure alarm
will be issued by 10s delay and the alarm will reset 10s later after the voltage return normal.
During the failure period, control function of direction or voltage to relevant protection is locked out
or temporarily disabled according to relevant logic settings as mentioned above.

When VT on a certain side is set as out of service, VT circuit failure detection on that side will be
disabled automatically.

3.12.2 CT circuits failure detection


When negative sequence current is higher than 0.06 In, CT circuit failure alarm will be issued by
10 s delay, and the alarm will reset 10s after the current return normal.

36 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

3.13 Protection of other Abnormalities

For backup protection of each side following protective functions are provided:

− Residual overvoltage alarm;


− Overload alarm;
− Cooling initiation;
− OLTC blocked by overload;
− Relevant protection at one side controlled by composite voltage at other side.

These functions can be enabled respectively by relevant logic setting.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 37


Chapter 3 Operation Theory

38 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

4.1 Percentage Differential Protection Logic Diagram

UrstDfrOp
1
1 & 1
DfrLkEn
1
UrstDfrVtLkEn
1
& 1
unrestraint differential relay
1 tripping
UrstDfrStrOp

StdSttHiPrcDfrOp
1
1 & 1
DfrLkEn
1
StdSttVtLkEn

1
IrsDscEn
1
& 1

TAInsF
1 1
& 1
1
DfrStrOp

StdSttLoDfrOp
1
1 & 1
DfrLkEn
1 1
>=1 1
steady state percentage
StdSttDfrVtLkEn 1 differential relay tripping

TASatDscEn
1
1
1
& 1 1
IrsDscEn 1 & 1
1
1 1
TAInsF & 1
1
TAFVtLkEn

1
DfrOvxBk >=1 1
1
MtpOvx>1.4

DfrStrOp

Fig. 4.1.1 Logic diagram of steady state percentage differential protection


In the figure:
Op – operated,
En – enabled,
UrstDfr – unrestrained differential relay,
DfrLk – binary input of enabling differential protection,
UrstDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling unrestraint differential protection,
StdSttHiPrcDfr – steady state high setting percentage differential protection,
IrsDsc – inrush current discrimination,
CTInsF – CT circuit instantaneous failure,
DfrStr – differential current fault detector,
StdSttLoDfr – steady state low setting percentage differential protection,
StdSttDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling steady state differential protection,
CTSatDsc – CT saturation discrimination,
CTFVtLk – virtual binary input of CT circuit failure detecting,
DfrBkOvx – differential protection blocked by overexcitation,
MtpOvx – multiple of overexcitation

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 39


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

4.2 DPFC percentage Differential Protection Logic Diagram

IrsDsc

DPFCDfrOP 1
1 &
1 1
& 1
1 1 1
DFRLK
1

DPFCDfrVTLK 1
& 1
DPFCdfrTripping
TAInsF 1
1
DfrBkOvx >=1 1
1
MtpOvx>1.4

DPFCDfrStr

Extend500ms

Fig. 4.2.1 Logic diagram of DPFC percentage differential protection

In the figure:

Op – operated,
En – enabled,
DfrLk –binary input of enabling differential protection,
DPFCDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling DPFC differential protection,
IrsDsc – inrush current discrimination,
CTInsF – CT circuit instantaneous failure,
DPFCDfrStr – differential current fault detector,
StdSttDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling steady state differential protection,
DfrBkOvx – differential protection blocked by overexcitation,
MtpOvx – multiple of overexcitation

Setting of DPFC percentage differential protection is fixed and need not to be set on site.

4.3 Logic Diagram of Residual Differential Protection, etc.

This section comprises logic diagram of residual percentage differential protection and
common-and-serial- windings percentage differential protection.

ZSPrcDfrOp
1
1 & 1
ZSDfrLkEn
1
1
ZSPrcDfrVtLkEn 1 & 1 1
1 & 1 zero sequence
percentage differential
TAInsF 1 protection tripping

TAAbn/SatDscEn

ZSDfrCStrOp

Fig. 4.3.1 Logic diagram of residual percentage differential protection

In the figure:

40 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

Op – operated,
En – enabled,
ZSPrcDfr – residual percentage differential protection,
ZSDfrLk – binary input of enabling residual differential protection,
ZSPrcDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling residual percentage differential protection,
CTInsF – CT circuit instantaneous fail,
CTAbn/SatDsc – CT circuit failure and saturation discrimination,
ZSDfrCStr – residual differential current fault detector.

For calculation of setting of residual percentage differential protection and common-and-serial-


windings percentage differential protection, please refer to Appendix A for details.

SdPrcDfrOp
1
1 & 1
SdDfrLkEn
1
1
SdPrcDfrVtLkEn 1 & 1 1
1 & 1 side percentage
differential protection
TAInsF 1 tripping

TAAbn/SatDscEn

SdDfrCStrOp

Fig. 4.3.2 Logic diagram of common-and-serial-windings percentage differential protection

In the figure:

Op – operated,
En – enabled,
SdPrcDfr – percentage common-and-serial-windings differential protection,
SdDfrLk – binary input of enabling common-and-serial-windings differential protection,
SdPrcDfrVtLk – virtual binary input of common-and-serial-windings percentage differential
protection,
CTInsF – CT circuit instantaneous fail,
CTAbn/SatDsc – CT circuit failure and saturation discrimination,
SdDfrCStr – common-and-serial-windings differential current fault detector.

4.4 Phase-to-Phase Distance Protection Logic Diagram

0
BkDisUsmF >=1
0
0 >=1
BkDisSmF BkDis
0 0
OCEnOs 10ms 0
&
0 160
0
PrIni
0
BkDis >=1

0
ImpBkOs
0 0
ImpLk & &
0 0 0
ImpVtLk &
0 0 0 T
ImpOp trip command
0 0
TVF >=1
0
ThSdVDisLk
0
ThSdVVtLk

ImpStrIni

Fig. 4.4.1 Logic diagram of distance protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 41


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

In the figure:

BkDisUsmF – blocking disabled during unsymmetrical fault,


BkDisUsmF – power swing blocking removed during unsymmetrical fault,
BkDisSmF – power swing blocking removed during symmetrical fault,
OCEnOs – overcurrent element for power swing detection
PrIni – fault detector picks up,
BkDis – blocking being removed,
ImpBkOs – distance protection blocked during power swing,
ImpLk – distance protection enabling binary input set on,
ImpVtLk – distance protection enabling virtual binary input set on,
ImpOp – distance relay operated ,
TVF – VT circuit failure,
ThSdVDisLk – this side VT-out-of-service binary input set on,
ThSdVDisVtLk – this side VT-out-of-service virtual binary input set on,
ImpStrIni – distance protection fault detector pickup

4.5 Logic Diagram of Directional Overcurrent Protection with

Composite Voltage Blocking

LcSdVDisLkEn >=1
LcSdVDisVtLkEn & local side composite
voltageelement operating
LoVOp >=1
&
NgSVOp & composite voltage
element
VTF >=1
&
PrPfmTVFEn
>=1
OthSdCmpVOp &
OCCtrOthSdCmpVEn
>=1
Fw F &
>=1 OCCtrCmpVEn
VTF
& directional
PrPfmVTF
relay
LcSdVDisLkEn >=1
LcSdVDisVtLkEn
&
>=1 t overcurrent relay
operating
OCCtrDr

OCOp
&
OCLkEn

OCVtLkEn

OCStrOp

Fig. 4.5.1 Logic diagram of directional overcurrent relay with composite voltage blocking

In the figure:

En – enabled,
Op – operated,
LcSdVDisLk – binary input of local side VT-out-of-service,
LcSdVDisVtLk – virtual binary input of local side voltage VT-out-of-service,
LoV – undervoltage element,
NgSV – negative sequence voltage element,
VTF – VT circuit failure,

42 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

PrPfmVTF – Logic setting [VT Supervision Criterion]


OthSdCmpV – other sides’ composite voltage element,
OCCtrOthSdCmpV – overcurrent relay controlled by other side composite voltage,
FwF – forward fault detected,
OCCtrDr – overcurrent relay controlled by directional element,
OC – overcurrent relay,
OCLk – binary input of enabling overcurrent protection,
OCVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling overcurrent protection,
OCStr – overcurrent fault detector.

4.6 Logic Diagram of Residual Overcurrent Protection

4.6.1 Definite time residual overcurrent logic diagram


ZSVOp &
VTF >=1

PrPfmVTFEn
&

LcSdVDisLkEn >=1 zero sequence voltage


element
LcSdVDisVtLkEn >=1
ZSOcCtrZSV

ZSDrEn &
VTF
>=1 zero sequence directional
PrPfmVTFEn & relay

LcSdVDisLkEn >=1
LcSdVDisVtLkEn &
>=1 & zero sequence
ZSOCCtrDrEn
t protection
tripping
ZSOCOp
&
ZSOCLkEn

ZSOCVtLkEn

HmEn >=1

ZSOCBkHmEn

ZSOCStrOp

Fig. 4.6.1 Logic diagram of definite time residual overcurrent relay

In the figure:

En – enabled,
Op – operated,
ZSV – residual voltage element,
VTF – VT circuit failure,
PrPfmVTF – protection performance during VT circuit failure,
LcSdVDisLk – binary input of local side VT-out-of-service,
LcSdVDisVtLk – virtual binary input of local side VT-out-of-service
ZSOCCtrZSV – residual overcurrent relay controlled by residual voltage element,
ZSDrEn – residual directional element enabled,
ZSOC – residual overcurrent element,
ZSOCLk – binary input of enabling residual overcurrent protection,
ZSOCVtLk – virtual binary input of enabling residual overcurrent protection,
Hm - harmonics blocking element doesn’t operate,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 43


Chapter 4 Protection Scheme and Logic Diagram

ZSOCBkHm - residual overcurrent protection blocked by harmonics,


ZSOCStr – residual overcurrent fault detector.

4.6.2 Inverse time residual overcurrent protection logic diagram

零序方向满足 &

TV断线 >=1

TV断线保护投退原则投入
&
>=1
本侧电压退出硬压板投入 零序方向元件

本侧电压退出软压板投入 >=1

零序反时限保护经方向闭锁投入

零序反时限过流元件动作
&
& & >=1 &
零序过流保护硬压板投入 t 零序反时限过流保护跳闸

零序反时限保护软压板投入
& 100ms延时
t
零序反时限经过100ms延时软压板投入

零序反时限保护起动元件动作

Fig. 4.6.2 Logic diagram of inverse time definite residual overcurrent

In the figure:

En – enabled,
Op – operated,
PTF – VT circuit failure,
PrPfmPTF – protection performance during VT circuit failure,
LcSdVDisLk – binary in of local side voltage disabled,
LcSdVDisVtLk – virtual binary input of local side voltage disabled,
ZSDrEn – residual directional relay enabled,
ZSROC – residual overcurrent relay,
ZSOCLk – binary input of residual overcurrent protection,
ZSROCVtLk – virtual binary input of residual overcurrent protection,
ZSROCDELAY 100VTLK — virtual binary input of enabling additional 100 delay ms for
residual overcurrent
ZSOCStr – residual overcurrent fault detector.

44 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1 Front and Rear Panel Interfaces

5.1.1 Front panel interface layout


The RCS-978E is made of a single layer 10U height 19” chassis with 15 connectors on its rear.
Fig. 5.1.1 shows its front view.

RCS-978
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

HE ALTHY
ALARM
TRIP

GRP
ENT

ESC
SIGNAL RESET

NARI-RELAYSELECTRICCO.,LTD.

Fig. 5.1.1 Front view of RCS-978E

5.1.2 Introduction of various part of the front panel


5.1.2.1 LCD display screen

The LCD display screen is an interface telling users of relay operation conditions. For instance, the
LCD shall indicate tripping commands, tripping outputs, failure status, binary input status and
event records. The information displayed on LCD can help user to judge the status of equipment.

5.1.2.2 LED indicators

There are three LED indicators on the front panel, “HEALTHY”, “ALARM” and “TRIP”.

“HEALTHY” is a green LED. It turns on during the normal operation and turns off when the relay
does not work. Users can judge why the relay fails to work by the information displayed on LCD
and try to resume the relay. Detailed advices are given in Chapter 9.

“ALARM” is a yellow LED. It turns on during the abnormal conditions and turns off when the
normal condition comes back. If the CT circuit failure occurs, the LED will not turn off until the
relay returns to the normal condition with a manually reset.

“TRIP” is a red LED. It turns on when the relay sends any tripping outputs and turns off when the
relay is reset by a local button “SIG RESET” on the front panel or by a remote reset command after

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 45


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

successful clearance of fault.

5.1.2.3 Communication with protection equipment by keyboard

Please refer to Chapter 9 for details of keyboard operations.


Note: Please refer to Chapter 7 Human Interface Operation Introduction for the details of usage of
LCD, LED, keypad and communication port in front panel.

5.1.3 Rear panel interface layout

Fig. 5.1.2 shows the rear view including connectors on it.

Fig. 5.1.2 Rear view of RCS-978E

5.1.4 Connectors and terminals


Note: For showing the relation of each terminal clearly, the terminal’s location shown in the figure may
be different from the real physical location, and we needn’t figure out the blank terminals in
some connectors.

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30
Fig. 5.1.3 Connector 1A of RCS-978E

46 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.1 Terminal definition of 1A connectors

Connector 1A: 30 pins male connector for tripping output

1,30 blank
3--5 tripping contact 1 of CB on side 1
7--9 tripping contact 2 of CB on side 1
11--13 tripping contact 3 of CB on side 1
15--17 tripping contact 4 of CB on side 1
19--21 tripping contact 1 of CB on side 2
23--25 tripping contact 2 of CB on side 2
27--29 tripping contact 3 of CB on side 2

2--4 spare tripping contact 1 of spare group 3


6--8 spare tripping contact 2 of spare group 3
10--12 spare tripping contact 3 of spare group 3
14--16 spare tripping contact 4 of spare group 3
18--20 spare tripping contact 1 of spare group 4
22--24 spare tripping contact 2 of spare group 4
26--28 spare tripping contact 1 of spare group 5

5.1.4.2 Terminal definition of 1B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.4 Connector 1B of RCS-978E

Connector 1B: 30 pins male connector for tripping output

1--3 tripping contact 4 of CB on side 2


5--7 tripping contact 1 of CB of bus coupler on side 1
9--11 tripping contact 2 of CB of bus coupler on side 1
13--15 tripping contact 3 of CB of bus coupler on side 1
17--19 tripping contact of CB on side 3
21--23 tripping contact of CB on side 4
25--27 tripping contact of bus sectioner on side 3,4

2--4 spare tripping contact 2 of spare group 5


6--8 spare tripping contact 3 of spare group 5
10--12 spare tripping contact 4 of spare group 5
14-16 spare tripping contact 1 of spare group 1
18--20 spare tripping contact 2 of spare group 1
22--24 spare tripping contact 1 of spare group 2
26--28 spare tripping contact 2 of spare group 2
29--30 tripping contact of CB of bus coupler on side 2

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 47


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.3 Terminal definition of 2A connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 6 10 14 18 22 26 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 30

Fig. 5.1.5 Connector 2A of RCS-978E

Connector 2A: 30 pins male connector for signal output

1 local signal: common terminal 1


1--3 local signal: differential protection tripping
1--5 local signal: backup protection tripping on side 1
1--7 local signal: backup protection tripping on side 2
1--9 local signal: backup protection tripping on side 3
1--11 local signal: backup protection tripping on side 4
1--13 local signal: backup protection tripping of common winding

15 local signal: common terminal 2


15--17 local signal: spare tripping signal 1
15--19 local signal: spare tripping signal 2
15--21 local signal: spare tripping signal 3
15--23 local signal: spare tripping signal 4

2 event record: common terminal 1


2--6 event record: differential protection tripping
2--10 event record: backup protection on side 1 tripping
2--14 event record: backup protection on side 2 tripping
2--18 event record: backup protection on side 3 tripping
2--22 event record: backup protection on side 4 tripping
2--26 event record: backup protection of common winding tripping

4 remote signal: common terminal 1


4--8 remote signal: differential protection tripping
4--12 remote signal: backup protection on side 1 tripping
4--16 remote signal: backup protection on side 2 tripping
2--20 remote signal: backup protection on side 3 tripping
4--24 remote signal: backup protection on side 4 tripping
4--28 remote signal: backup protection of common winding tripping

30 remote signal: common terminal 2


30--25 remote signal: spare tripping signal 1
30--27 remote signal: spare tripping signal 2
30--29 remote signal: spare tripping signal 3
30--2B1 remote signal: spare tripping signal 4

48 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.4 Terminal definition of 2B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

+24V

2A30 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 0V

Fig. 5.1.6 Connector 2B of RCS-978E

Connector 2B: 30 pins male connector for status input (via 24 V opto-coupler)

1 remote signal: spare tripping signal 4 (2A30 is its common terminal)


3 event record: common terminal 2,
3--5 event record: spare tripping signal 1
3--2 event record: spare tripping signal 2
3--4 event record: spare tripping signal 3
3--6 event record: spare tripping signal 4
7 binary input: differential protection enabled
8 binary input: overcurrent backup protection on side 3 enable
9 binary input: backup phase-to-phase protection on side 2 enabled
10 binary input: backup phase-to-ground protection on side 2 enable
11 binary input: backup protection of common winding enabled
12 binary input: overcurrent backup protection on side 4 enable
13 binary input: “Gap” protection on side 1 enable
14 binary input: “Gap” protection on side 2 enable
15 binary input: VT on side 4 out-of-service
16 binary input: VT on side 1 out-of-service
17 binary input: backup phase-to-phase protection on side 1 enabled
18 binary input: VT on side 2 out-of-service
19 binary input: VT on side 3 out-of-service
20 binary input: reset signal
21 spare binary input 2
22 binary input: backup phase-to-ground protection on side 1 enable
23 spare binary input 3
24 spare binary input 4
25 spare binary input 5
26 binary input: residual differential protection enabled
29 status input: common terminal (24 V opto-coupler)
30 Power supply for binary input opt-couplers: 24 V negative pole

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 49


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.5 Terminal definition of 3A connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.7 Connector 3A of RCS-978E

Connector 3A: 30 pins male connector for signal and alarm output

1 remote signal: common terminal


1--3 remote signal: equipment blocked/unhealthy
1--5 remote signal: equipment alarm
1--7 remote signal: CT circuit failure
1--9 remote signal: VT circuit failure
1--11 remote signal: overload alarm
1--13 remote signal: residual voltage element on side 3 alarm
1--15 remote signal: residual voltage element on side 4 alarm
1--17 remote signal: protection of common winding alarm
1--19 remote signal: protection on side 1 alarm
1--21 remote signal: protection on side 2 alarm
1--23 remote signal: protection on side 3 alarm
1--25 remote signal: protection on side 4 alarm
27--29 output contact: contact 2 of cooling initiating stage 1

2 local signal: common terminal


2--4 local signal: equipment blocked/unhealthy
2--6 local signal: equipment alarm
2--8 local signal: CT circuit failure
2--10 local signal: VT circuit failure
2--12 local signal: overload alarm
2--14 remote signal: residual voltage element on side 3 alarm
2--16 remote signal: residual voltage element on side 4 alarm
2--18 remote signal: protection of common winding alarm
2--20 remote signal: protection on side 1 alarm
2--22 remote signal: protection on side 2 alarm
2--24 remote signal: protection on side 3 alarm
2--26 remote signal: protection on side 4 alarm
28--30 output contact: contact 1 of cooling initiating stage 1

50 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.6 Terminal definition of 3B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.8 Connector 3B of RCS-978E

Connector 3B: 30 pins male connector for alarm and other output

1--3 output contact: contact 1 of cooling initiating stage 2


5--7 output contact: contact 2 of cooling initiating stage 2
9--11 spare output contact 1 of group 1
13--15 spare output contact 2 of group 1
17--19 output contact 1 of operation of composite voltage element
21--23 output contact 2 of operation of composite voltage element
25--27 output contact 2 for OLTC blocking

2 blank

4 event record: common terminal


4--6 event record: CT circuit failure
4--8 event record: VT circuit failure
4--10 event record: overload alarm
4--12 event record: residual protection on side 3 alarm
4--14 event record: residual protection on side 4 alarm
4--16 event record: protection of common winding alarm
4--18 event record: protection on side 1 alarm
4--20 event record: protection on side 2 alarm
4--22 event record: protection on side 3 alarm
4--24 event record: protection on side 4 alarm
4--26 event record: equipment blocked
4--28 event record: equipment alarm
29--30 output contact 1 for OLTC blocking

5.1.4.7 Terminal definition of 4B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.9 Connector 4B of RCS-978E

Connector 4B: 30 pins male connector for status input

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 51


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

1 binary input 16 (via 24 V opto-coupler)


3 binary input 21 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
5 binary input 20 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
7 binary input 19 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
9 binary input 18 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
11 binary input 17 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
13 binary input: initiate printing button(via 24 V opto-coupler)
15 binary input 11 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
17 Power supply for binary input opt-couplers: common terminal;24 V positive pole
19 binary input 3 (via 250/220/125/110V opto-coupler)
21 binary input of OPEN state 52b of CB on side 1(via 250/220/125/110V opto-coupler)
23 binary input 1 (via 250/220/125/110V opto-coupler)
25 DC power supply +
27 DC power supply -
29 ground

2 status input 9 (via 24 V opto-coupler)


4 status input 15 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
6 status input 7 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
8 status input 14 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
10 status input 5 (via 24 V opto-coupler)
12 maintenance status setting (via 24 V opto-coupler)
14 time synchronization pulse input (via 24 V opto-coupler)
16 24V opto-coupler, ground
18 blank
20 binary input 2 (via 250/220/125/110V opto-coupler)
22 binary input of OPEN state 52b of CB on side 2(via 250/220/125/110V opto-coupler)
24 blank
26 blank
28 blank
30 ground

5.1.4.8 Terminal definition of 5B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

A B A B A B TX RX EARTH
485 485 485 printer
PORT PORT PORT PORT

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.10 Connector 5B of RCS-978E

Connector 5B: 30 pins male connector for communication and printer

1,3 GPS minute/second pulse signal input via RS-485.


5,7 RS-485, serial port 1
9,11 RS-485, serial port 2
21 printer port, Tx
23 printer port, Rx
27 ground of serial ports

52 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

29 ground of chassis

5.1.4.9 Terminal definition of 6B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29

A B A B A B TX RX EARTH
485 485 485 printer
PORT PORT PORT PORT

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

Fig. 5.1.11 Connector 6B of RCS-978E

Connector 6B: 30 pins male connector for communication and printer

1,3 GPS minute/second pulse signal input via RS-485.


5,7 RS-485, serial port 1
9,11 RS-485, serial port 2
21 printer port, Tx
23 printer port, Rx
27 ground of serial ports
29 ground of chassis

5.1.4.10 Terminal definition of 7B connectors

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25

UL UN UL UN UL UN UL UN

TO LPF TO LPF TO LPF TO LPF


TO LPF TO LPF TO LPF TO LPF

UA UB U C UN UA UB U C UN UA UB U C UN UA UB U C UN

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 27 28 29 30

Fig. 5.1.12 Connector 7B of RCS-978E

Connector 7B: 30 pins for voltage input

11,13 residual voltage input circuit on side 1.


15,17 residual voltage input circuit on side 2.
19,21 residual voltage input circuit on side 3.
23,25 residual voltage input circuit on side 4.
2,4,6,8 3 phase voltage input circuit on side 1
10,12,14,16 3 phase voltage input circuit on side 2
18,20/,22,24 3 phase voltage input circuit on side 3
27,28,29,30 3 phase voltage input circuit on side 4

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 53


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.11 Terminal definition of 7C connectors


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16

IG 0 N IG 0 IG0N IG 0
TO L P F

Fig. 5.1.13 Connector 7C of RCS-978E

Terminal block 7C: 18 terminals for current input


7 residual current input circuit on side 1
8 residual current input circuit on side 1 (polarity mark)
9 residual current input circuit on side 2
10 residual current input circuit on side 2 (polarity mark)
others blank

5.1.4.12 Terminal definition of 8B connectors


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

I AN IA I BN IB I CN IC I AN IA I BN IB I CN IC
TO LP F TO L PF
TO L PF
I AN IA I BN IB IC N IC

13 14 15 16 17 18

Fig. 5.1.14 Connector 8B of RCS-978E

Terminal block 8B: 18 terminals for current input


1 Phase A current input circuit on side 1
2 Phase A current input circuit on side 1(polarity mark)
3 Phase B current input circuit on side 1
4 Phase B current input circuit on side 1(polarity mark)
5 Phase C current input circuit on side 1
6 Phase C AC current input circuit on side 1(polarity mark)
7 Phase A current input circuit on side 2
8 Phase A current input circuit on side 2(polarity mark)
9 Phase B current input circuit on side 2
10 Phase B current input circuit on side 2(polarity mark)
11 Phase C current input circuit on side 2
12 Phase C current input circuit on side 2(polarity mark)
13 Phase A current input circuit on side 3
14 Phase A current input circuit on side 3(polarity mark)
15 Phase B AC current input circuit on side 3
16 Phase B AC current input circuit on side 3(polarity mark)
17 Phase C AC current input circuit on side 3
18 Phase C AC current input circuit on side 3(polarity mark)

54 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.1.4.13 Terminal definition of 8C connectors

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

I AN IA I BN IB ICN IC I AN IA IBN IB ICN IC


TO L PF T O LPF
T O LPF
IG0N IG0 IG0N IG0 IG0N IG0

13 14 15 16 17 18

Fig. 5.1.15 Connector 8C of RCS-978E

Terminal block 8C: 18 terminals for current input

1 Phase A current input circuit on side 4


2 Phase A current input circuit on side 4(polarity mark)
3 Phase B current input circuit on side 4
4 Phase B current input circuit on side 4 (polarity mark)
5 Phase C current input circuit on side 4
6 Phase C current input circuit on side 4 (polarity mark)
7 Phase A current input circuit of common wingding
8 Phase A current input circuit of common wingding (polarity mark)
9 Phase B current input circuit of common wingding
10 Phase B current input circuit of common wingding (polarity mark)
11 Phase C current input circuit of common wingding
12 Phase C current input circuit of common wingding (polarity mark)
13 “Gap” residual current on side 1
14 “Gap” residual current on side 1 (polarity mark)
15 “Gap” residual current on side 2
16 “Gap” residual current on side 2 (polarity mark)
17 residual current of common winding
18 residual current of common winding (polarity mark)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 55


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.2 Functional Block Diagram

5.2.1 Function block diagram

opto- binary
AC cur rent DSP1 status
and voltage
LPF A/D DSP2 coupler input

CPLD
output
HMI CPU1 relay
LC D
C PU module
HMI- CPU QD J
c omm por ts and
port to printer
E+
MMI
D SP3 opto- binary
LPF A/D coupler status
D SP4 input
DC 220 V

+5 V
or 110 V

CPLD
DC/DC

± 12 V
+ 24 V
HMI C PU2
± 24 V to
optic-c oupler MNG module

comm ports and


por t to printer

Fig. 5.2.1 Function block diagram of RCS-978E

5.2.2 Operational processing


The relay comprises two independent and identical central modules-one CPU module and one
management (MON) module. Every module consists of two digital signal processor chips DSP,
one 32 bits monolithic processor and independent sampling and output circuits. Tasks are
distributed to three microprocessors running in parallel on each module and strong ability on data
processing and logic processing can be achieved then.

Every 1/24 cycle of power system, the equipment can finish as many work as mentioned bellow:
AC current and voltage inputs are converted into low voltage signals firstly; These signals are
introduced into CPU module and MON module respectively, passing through low pass filter LPF
and A/D converter, entering DSP for digital signal processing. Calculation of main and backup
protection is performed in DSP2 and DSP1 respectively. Functions like logic processing, tripping
command sending, sequence of events recording, waveform recording, printing, communication
with the host and communication with HMI-CPU are performed in “CPU module”.

Working procedure of MON module is similar to that of CPU module. However, criteria of fault
detector are discriminated in this module and it connects power supply of output relay when fault
detector picks up and records oscillogram of fault of transformer. All data recorded can be output
and printed.

Power supply part is comprised in DC module. It converts DC 250/220/125/110 V into different DC


voltage needed by various modules of the equipment. It comprises also 250/220/125/110 V
opto-coupler for binary input.

AC current and voltage are input and converted to low voltage signals in modules AC1 and AC2.
Two rated currents of AC current are option, 1 A or 5 A. It shall be stated definitely during
ordering and checked during commissioning.

56 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

Tripping commands, tripping signal output and binary input parts are comprised in three modules:
OUT, SIG1 and SIG2. 24 V opto-couplers are used here for binary input.

Briefly, the equipment is composed of ten modules to achieve the protection of transformer. The
modules are AC current input module (AC1), AC voltage and current input module 1 (AC2), AC
voltage and current input module 2 (AC3, only for 978HB), management/record module (MON),
protection CPU module (CPU), power supply module (DC), signal module 2 (SIG2), signal module
1 (SIG1), tripping contacts output (OUT) and human-machine interface (HMI).

5.2.3 Inputs listed by function


5.2.3.1 Table of binary inputs

Terminal Signal name (displayed) Function (when energized)


2B29-2B7 Diff. Prot. ContactInput
Enable differential protection
2B29-2B26 WindingDiff Prot ContactInput Enable residual differential protection or common-and-
serial-windings differential protection of auto- transformer
4B25-4B25 Backup ContactInput5 Spare binary input 5
2B29-2B17 Side1 OC Prot. ContactInput Enable phase-to-phase backup protection of side 1
2B29-2B22 Side1 ROC Prot. ContactInput Enable phase-to-ground backup protection of side 1
2B29-2B13 Side1 Gap Prot. ContactInput Enable “Gap” protection on side 1
2B29-2B9 Side2 OC Prot. ContactInput Enable phase-to-phase backup protection of side 2
2B29-2B10 Side2 ROC Prot. ContactInput Enable phase-to-ground backup protection of side 2
2B29-2B14 Side2 Gap Prot. ContactInput Enable “Gap” protection on side 2
2B29-2B8 Side3 OC Prot. ContactInput Enable overcurrent backup protection on side 3
2B29-2B12 Side4 OC Prot. ContactInput Enable overcurrent backup protection on side 4
2B29-2B11 ComWind BakProt. ContactInput Enable common winding backup protection
2B29-2B15 Side4 VT Out of Service VT on side 4 out of service
2B29-2B19 Side 3 VT Out of Service VT on side 3 out of service
2B29-2B18 Side2 VT Out of Service VT on side 2 out of service
2B29-2B16 Side1 VT Out of Service VT on side 1 out of service
2B29-2B24 Backup ContactInput4 Spare binary input 4
2B29-2B23 Backup ContactInput3 Spare binary input 3
2B29-2B21 Backup ContactInput2 Spare binary input 2
4B17-4B12 Monitor Comm. Blk Maintenance status setting enabled
4B17-4B13 Print BinaryInput Initiate printing
4B17-4B14 Time Pulse Signal Time synchronization pulse input
4B25-4B21 Side1 BreakerOff Auxiliary contact of breaker’s open position 52b on side 1
4B25-4B22 Side2 BreakerOff Auxiliary contact of breaker’s open position 52b on side 2

Two kind of opt-coupler are provided in the relay:


− LV type is energized by field votage +24V
− HV type is energized by power supply of relay.
2B29 is the positive pole of field votage +24V provided by the relay itself through 4B17.
2B30 is the negative pole of field votage +24V provided by the relay itself through 4B16.
4B25 is the positive pole of power supply of relay.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 57


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.2.3.2 Communication input

Terminal Input name Function


5B1 485A
GPS minute/second pulse input
5B3 485B
5B5 485A
RS-485 communication port 1 to substation automation system
5B7 485B
5B9 485A
RS-485 communication port 2 to substation automation system
5B11 485B
5B21 Tx
5B23 Rx RS-232 communication port to printer
5B27 Earth

5.2.4 Output
5.2.4.1 Tripping outputs
Trip (spare) 3 Trip CB on side 1 Trip CB of bus coupler on side 1
1 1 1
1A02 1A04 1A03 1A05 1B05 1B07
2 2
2 1A09 1B09 1B11
1A06 1A08 1A07
3
3 3 1B13 1B15
1A10 1A12 1A11 1A13
Trip bus coupler(BC) on side2
4
4 1A15 1A17 1B29 1B30
1A14 1A16
Trip (spare) 4 Trip CB on side 2 Trip bus sectioner(BS) on side3,4
1 1
1A18 1A20 1A19 1A21 1B25 1B27
2 2
1A22 1A24 1A23 1A25 tripping (spare) 1
3 1
1B14 1B16
Trip (spare) 5 1A27 1A29
1 4 2
1A26 1A28 1B01 1B03 1B18 1B20
2 tripping (spare) 2
1B02 1B04 Trip CB on side 3 1
3 1B17 1B19 1B22 1B24
1B06 1B08
2
Trip CB on side 4 1B26 1B28
4
1B10 1B12 1B21 1B23

Fig. 5.2.2 Diagram of tripping outputs

5.2.4.2 Signaling outputs


remote
local signal event record
2A01 signal 2A02 2A04
diff erential prot. trip differential prot. trip differential prot. trip
2A03 2A06 2A08
backup prot. on side1 trip backup prot. on side1 trip backup prot. on side1 trip
2A05 2A10 2A12
backup prot. on side2 trip backup prot. on side2 trip backup prot. on side2 trip
2A07 2A14 2A16
backup prot. on side3 trip backup prot. on side3 trip backup prot. on side3 trip
2A09 2A18 2A20
backup prot. on side4 trip backup prot. on side4 trip backup prot. on side4 trip
2A11 2A22 2A24
backup prot. of CW trip backup prot. of CW trip backup prot. of CW trip
2A13 2A26 2A28
spare local signal spare remote signal spare event record
2A15 2A30 2B03
1 1 1
2A17 2A25 2B05
2 2 2
2A19 2A27 2B02
3 3 3
2A21 2A29 2B04
4 4 4
2A23 2B01 2B06

Fig. 5.2.3 Diagram signaling outputs

58 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

5.2.4.3 Alarm outputs

Local signal Remote signal Event record


3A02 3A01 3B04
E quipment blocking Equipment blocking Equipment blocking
3A04 3A03 3B26
Equipm ent alarm Equipment alarm Equipment alarm
3A06 3A05 3B28
TA f ail TA fail TA fail
3A08 3A07 3B06
TV fail TV fail TV fail
3A10 3A09 3B08
Overload alarm Overload alarm Overload alarm
3A12 3A11 3B10
ZS.V olt. on side 3 alarm ZS.Volt.on side 3 alarm ZS.Volt.on side 3 alarm
3A14 3A13 3B12
ZS.V olt. on side 4 alarm ZS.Volt.on side 4 alarm ZS.Volt.on side 4 alarm
3A16 3A15 3B14
Protection on CW alarm Protect ion on CW alarm Protect ion on CW alarm
3A18 3A17 3B16
Protection on side1 alarm Protection on side1 alarm P rotection on side1 alarm
3A20 3A19 3B18
Protection on side2 alarm Protection on side2 alarm P rotection on side2 alarm
3A22 3A21 3B20
Protection on side3 alarm Protection on side3 alarm P rotection on side3 alarm
3A24 3A23 3B22
Protection on side4 alarm Protection on side4 alarm P rotection on side4 alarm
3A26 3A25 3B24

Fig. 5.2.4 Diagram of alarm outputs

5.2.4.4 Other outputs

Zone 1 of air cooling initiation Voltage regulation blocked Other ouput contacts(spare)1
1 1 1
3A28 3A30 3B29 3B30 3B09 3B11
2 2 2
3A27 3A29 3B25 3B27 3B13 3B15
Zone 2 of air cooling initiation Busbar dif ferential protection blocking
3 disabled by conposite voltage element
1
3B01 3B03 2B17 2B19
4 2
3B05 3B07 2B21 2B23

Fig. 5.2.5 Diagram of other outputs

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 59


Chapter 5 Hardware Description

60 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Chapter 6 Parameters

6.1 Equipment Parameters

No. Setting Abbreviation Range


1 active setting group number Active Group 0 – 16
2 number of the equipment Equipment Name 6 characters maximum
3 communication address Equipment Comm. Addr. 0 – 254
4 baud rate of port 1 Comm. Port1 Baud Rate 4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4kit/s
5 baud rate of port 2 Comm. Port2 Baud Rate 4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4kit/s
6 baud rate of printer Printer Baud Rate 4.8/9.6/19.2/38.4kit/s
7 automatic printing Automatic Print Option 1 or 0
8 shared network printer Network Printer Option 1 or 0
9 communication protocol Comm. Protocol Option 1 or 0
10 enable remote modification Enable Remote Modify Setting 1 or 0
11 maintenance status Enable Monitor Comm. Blk 1 or 0
12 inrush current floating threshold disabled Disable Adaptive InrushThreshold 1 or 0

Note: Abbreviations listed here and hereinafter are used for communication, printing and displaying on
LCD.

Explanation of the parameter and notice in parameter setting:


1 Active Group :

Number of active protection setting groups for selection. Sixteen setting groups are provided, and
only one is active. Note that there is only one the equipment parameter and power system
parameter group, that is, when we modify equipment parameters or power system parameters, the
modification will affect all groups of protection settings.

2 Equipment Name:

ASCII code, as identification for report printing only.

3 Equipment Comm. Addr.:

Communication address of the equipment with host of SCADA system.

4 Comm. Port1 Baud Rate:

Baud rate of serial ports 1 which shall be selected from the specified range.

5 Comm. Port2 Baud Rate:

Baud rate of serial ports 2 which shall be selected from the specified range.

6 Printer Baud Rate

Baud rate of printer. This shall be set as “1” for printing baud rate 4.8 kbit/s or “0” for 9.6 kbit/s.

7 Automatic Print Option:

This shall be set as “1” if automatic report printing is expected after operation of the equipment is

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 61


Chapter 6 Parameters

selected. Otherwise it shall be set as “0”. It is suggested that the user may set this parameter of a
protection equipment which is always connected directly with a printer as “1”, i.e., automatic
printing, and set this parameter of other protection equipments which are connected with the
printer by switching as “0”, i.e., not automatic printing. When the equipment is set as automatic
printing, only differential current and relevant waveform of differential current of all sides after
regulation will be printed. Other items like waveforms of original voltage and current of all sides
can be printed by selection on menu “report printing”.

8 Network Printer Option:

The setting shall be set as “1” if a shared network printer is used or “0” if dedicated printer is used.
Network printer means several protection equipments share one printer through a printer
management unit and RS-485 port. Dedicated printer means the protection equipment
connected with a printer through RS-232 port directly.

9 Comm. Protocol Option:

This shall be set as “1” for protocol IEC 60870-5-103 or “0” for proprietary protocol LFP.

10 Enable Remote Modify Setting:

This shall be set as “1” if the equipment can be configured remotely. Otherwise it shall be set as
“0”.

11 Enable Monitor Comm. Blk:

This shall be set as “1” if the equipment is in maintenance status and then no message shall be
transmitted to the host. Otherwise it shall be set as “0”.

12 Disable Adaptive Inrush Threshold:

This shall be set as “1” to disable adaptive inrush threshold. ‘0’ is recommended.

62 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

6.2 Power System Parameters

No. Symbol Abbreviation (displayed) Range Step


1 integer part of transformer capacity Trans. Capa. IntPart 0 – 999 1 MVA
2 decimal part of transformer capacity Trans. Capa. DecPart 0 – 99 0.01 MVA
3 rated power frequency Rated Frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz
secondary rated current of CT for
4 CT Sec. Rated Curr 1A/ 5A
current differential protection
secondary rated current of residual CT6
5 S1 ZS CT6 Sec RatedCurr 0 – 10 A 0.01 A
on side 1
secondary rated current of “Gap”
6 S1 Gap ZS CT7 Sec RatedCurr 0 – 10 A 0.01 A
residual CT7 on side1
secondary rated current of residual CT8
7 S2 ZS CT8 Sec. RatedCurr 0 – 10 A 0.01 A
on side 2
secondary rated current of “Gap”
8 S2 Gap ZS CT9 Sec RatedCurr 0 – 10 A 0.01 A
residual CT9 circuit on side 2
secondary rated current of residual
9 CW ZS CT10 Sec. RatedCurr 0 – 10 A 0.01 A
CT10 of common winding
rated current of residual CT6 primary
10 S1 ZS CT6 Pri. RatedCurr 0 – 65535 A 1A
circuit on Side 1
primary rated current of “Gap” residual
11 S1 Gap ZS CT7 Pri RatedCurr 0 – 65535 A 1A
CT7 on side 1
primary rated current of residual CT8 on
12 S2 ZS CT8 Pri. RatedCurr 0 – 65535 A 1A
side 2
primary rated current of “Gap” residual
13 S2 Gap ZS CT9 Pri RatedCurr 0 – 65535 A 1A
CT9 on side 2
primary rated current of residual CT10
14 CW ZS CT10 Pri. RatedCurr 0 – 65535 A 1A
of common winding
57.7V or 65.5V
15 secondary rated voltage of VT VT Sec. Rated Volt.
per phase
secondary rated voltage of residual
16 S1 ZS VT1 Sec. Rated Volt. 100V or 33.33V
VT1 on side 1
secondary rated voltage of residual
17 S2 ZS VT2 Sec. Rated Volt. 100V or 33.33V
VT2 on side 2
secondary rated voltage of residual
18 S3 ZS VT3 Sec. Rated Volt. 100V or 33.33V
VT3 on side 3
secondary rated voltage of residual
19 S4 ZS VT4 Sec. Rated Volt. 100V or 33.33V
VT4 on side 4
20 primary rated voltage of VT1 on side 1 S1 VT1 Pri. Rated Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
21 primary rated voltage of VT2 on side 2 S2 VT2 Pri. Rated Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
22 primary rated voltage of VT3 on side 3 S3 VT3 Pri. Rated Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
23 primary rated voltage of VT4 on side 4 S4 VT4 Pri. Rated Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
24 primary rated voltage on side 1 Side1 System Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
25 primary rated voltage on side 2 Side2 System Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
26 primary rated voltage on side 3 Side3 System Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
27 primary rated voltage on side 4 Side4 System Volt. 0 – 6550 kV 0.01 kV
28 connection mode of transformer Trans. Connection Mode 0,1,2,3,5,6,7

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 63


Chapter 6 Parameters

Logic settings
29 main protection enabled Enable Diff. Protection 0, 1
30 backup protection on side 1 enabled Enable Side1 BakProt 0, 1
31 backup protection on side 2 enabled Enable Side2 BakProt 0, 1
32 backup protection on side 3 enabled Enable Side3 BakProt 0, 1
33 backup protection on side 4 enabled Enable Side4 BakProt 0, 1
backup protection of common winding
34 Enable ComWind BakProt 0, 1
enabled

Explanation of the settings:

1 Trans. Capa. IntPart

Trans. Capa. IntPart is the integer part of transformer capacity in MVA. Transformer capacity is
equal to its integer part (1)×1 MVA plus its decimal part (2)×0.01 MVA. Maximum configurable
capacity is 999 MVA. For the differential protection relay, to get current magnitude compensation
ratio of each side of the transformer automatically, several basic parameters are needed, the basic
parameters are transformer capacity, nominal phase-to-phase voltage of each side and CT ratio of
each side.

2 Trans. Capa. DecPart

Trans. Capa. DecPart is the decimal fraction part of transformer capacity in MVA.

3 Rated Frequency

The nominal frequency of power system in which the transformer protection equipment is used.

4 CT Sec. Rated Curr

The secondary rated current mentioned here is the rated current at second side of various CT for
differential protection purpose. Second rated current of CT on various sides of differential
protection shall be the same value. If not, definite statement during ordering must be made.
That of CT on various sides of backup protection can be different with each other.

5 S1 ZS CT6 Sec. RatedCurr

Secondary rated current of residual CT6 on side 1.

6 S1 Gap ZS CT7 Sec RatedCurr

Secondary rated current of “Gap” residual CT7 on side1.

7 S2 ZS CT8 Sec. RatedCurr

Secondary rated current of residual CT6 on side 2

8 S2 Gap ZS CT9 Sec RatedCurr

Secondary rated current of “Gap” residual CT9 on side2.

9 CW ZS CT10 SEC RatedCurr

Secondary rated current of residual CT10 of common winding. Current ratio of this CT will be got
from this one and 14 setting. For not used residual CT on various sides, their secondary shall be
set as 1 A or 5 A.

64 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

10 S1 ZS CT6 Pri. Rated Curr.

Rated current of residual CT6 primary circuit on side 1. From this value and secondary current
of CT6 (5 setting), current ratio of CT6 can be got.

11 S1 Gap ZS CT7 Pri Rated Curr.

Primary rated current of “Gap” residual CT7 on side 1

12 S2 ZS CT8 Pri. RatedCurr.


Primary rated current of residual CT8 on side 2.

13 S2 Gap ZS CT9 Pri RatedCurr.


Primary rated current of “Gap” residual CT9 on side 2.

14 CW ZS CT10 Pri. RatedCurr.


Primary rated current of residual CT10 of common winding.

15 VT Sec. Rated Volt.


Secondary rated voltage of VT. In general, it is set as 57.7V or 65.5V.

16 S1 ZS VT1 Sec. Rated Volt.


Secondary rated voltage of residual VT1 on side 1.

17 S2 ZS VT2 Sec. Rated Volt.


Secondary rated voltage of residual VT1 on side 2.

18 S3 ZS VT3 Sec. Rated Volt.


Secondary rated voltage of residual VT1 on side 3.

19 S4 ZS VT4 Sec. Rated Volt.


Secondary rated voltage of residual VT1 on side 4.

20 S1 VT1 Pri. Rated Volt.


Primary rated voltage of VT1 on side 1. This is the phase voltage. For example, if the voltage
ratio is 220 kV/100 V, this value shall be 220 kV/√3. This is used for substation automation
system. Secondary voltage and current recorded will be transferred to primary value when fault
oscillogram is sent to the host.

21 S2 VT2 Pri. Rated Volt.


Primary rated voltage of VT2 on side 2. This is the phase voltage. For example, if the voltage
ratio is 110 kV/100 V, this value shall be 110 kV/√3. The function of this parameter is similar to 20
setting.

22 S3 VT3 Pri. Rated Volt.


Primary rated voltage of VT3 on side 3. This is the phase voltage. The function of this
parameter is similar to 20 setting.

23 S4 VT4 Pri. Rated Volt.


Primary rated voltage of VT4 on side 4. This is the phase voltage. The function of this
parameter is similar to 20 setting.

24 Side1 System Volt.


Primary rated voltage on side 1. This is the rated voltage printed on the nameplate of transformer.
For transformer with on-load-tap-changer (OLTC), this setting can take the voltage value when the

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 65


Chapter 6 Parameters

voltage tap is in middle position. For example, if the voltage on 220 kV side of a transformer with
OLTC when tap in its middle position is 230 kV, as to other kind of transformers, actual operation
line voltage shall be taken as this parameter, otherwise voltage balance coefficient may be wrong.
The 25 -- 27 is similar to this one.

25 Side2 System Volt.


Primary rated voltage on side 2.

26 Side3 System Volt.


Primary rated voltage on side 3.

27 Side4 System Volt.


Primary rated voltage on side 4.

28 Trans. Connection Mode


Connection group of transformer. There are as many connection groups of transformer on each
sides and branches as follows.

Item Connection mode Setting


0 Y12/Y12/Y12/Y12 0
1 Y12/Y12/Y12/Δ 11 1
2 Y12/Y12/Δ 11/Δ 11 2
3 Y12/Δ 11/Δ 11/Δ 11 3
5 Y12/Y12/Y12/Δ 1 5
6 Y12/Y12/Δ 1/Δ 1 6
7 Y12/Δ 1/Δ 1/Δ 1 7
Attention:
Connection group shows in turn the connection on side 1 / side 2 / side 3 / side 4.
Connection group of transformer is determined not by actual connections on its three sides but by
the branches which are included within the differential protection.
29 Enable Diff. Protection
This is a general logic setting of main protection. It is used for enabling all differential protection
configured in RCS-978E, including percentage differential, DPFC percentage differential, residual
percentage differential and common-and-serial-windings differential for autotransformer. The
function of this logic setting is similar to the external binary input “enable differential protection”
mounted on the rack.

30 Enable Side1 BakProt


Backup protection on side 1 enabled. If backup protection on side 1 is disabled, it shall be set as
“0”.

Note: 31 — 33 is similar to this one.

31 Enable Side2 BakProt

Backup protection on side 2 enabled.

32 Enable Side3 BakProt

Backup protection on side 3 enabled.

33 Enable Side4 BakProt

66 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Backup protection on side 4 enabled.

34 Enable ComWind BakProt

Backup protection of common winding enabled. This is a general logic setting for all backup
protective functions of common winding of an autotransformer.

Note:
Many logic settings are used for configuration of protective functions. Setting “1” means
“enabled”, “valid” or “yes” while “0” means “disabled”, “invalid” or “no” with some
exceptions explained in details.

6.3 Settings of Main Protection

No. Setting Abbreviation (displayed) Range Step


1 primary rated current of CT1 on side 1 Side1 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr 0 - 65535A 1A
2 primary rated current of CT2 on side 2 Side2 CT2 Pri. RatedCurr 0 - 65535A 1A
3 primary rated current of CT3 on side 3 Side3 CT3 Pri RatedCurr 0 - 65535A 1A
4 primary rated current of CT4 on side 4 Side4 CT4 Pri RatedCurr 0 - 65535A 1A
5 primary rated current of CT5 on common winding ComWind CT5 Pri. Rated 0 - 65535A 1A
Curr
6 setting of differential current fault detector Diff. Pickup Curr. 0.1 - 1.5Ie 0.01Ie
7 restraint coefficient of percentage differential prot. Diff. Stabilizing Factor 0.2 - 0.75 0.01
8 restraint coefficient of second harmonics 2nd Harm. Stab. Factor 0.05 - 0.35 0.01
9 restraint coefficient of third harmonics 3rd Harm. Stab. Factor 0.05 - 0.35 0.01
10 setting of unrestrained instantaneous differential 2 - 14Ie 0.01Ie
Inst. Diff. Curr.
protection
11 setting of differential current alarm Diff. CT Superv. Alarm 0.01 - 1.5Ie 0.01Ie
12 residual or common-and-serial-windings differ- 0.1 - 1.5In 0.01In
REF Pickup Curr.
rential current fault detector
13 restraint coefficient of residual or common-and- 0.2 - 0.75 0.01
REF Stabilizing Factor
serial-windings differential current fault detector
Logic settings
14 differential protection blocked by CT circuit failure CT Superv. Blk Diff. 0, 1, 2
15 residual or common-and-serial-windings differential 0, 1, 2
CT Superv. Blk REF
protection blocked by CT circuit failure
16 inrush current blocking mode Inrush Blk Diff. 0, 1
17 tripping output logic setting of differential protection 0000-FFFFH
Diff. Prot. TripMatrix
for main transformer
18 unrestrained instantaneous differential protection 0, 1
Enable Inst. Diff. Prot.
enabled
19 percentage differential protection enabled Enable Percent Diff.Prot. 0, 1
20 residual or common-and-serial-windings differ- 0, 1
Enable REF Prot.
rential protection enabled
21 DPFC differential protection enabled Enable DPFC Diff. Prot. 0, 1
22 overexcitation ratio reference OverExci. Ratio Reference 0, 1
23 third harmonics blocking enabled Enable3rd Harm.Blk Diff. 0, 1

Explanation of the parameter and notice in parameter setting:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 67


Chapter 6 Parameters

1 Side1 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr


Primary rated current of CT1 on side 1. The CT is used for differential protection on side 1. 2—5 is
similar to this one.

2 Side2 CT2 Pri. RatedCurr


Primary rated current of CT2 on side 2.

3 Side3 CT3 Pri. RatedCurr


Primary rated current of CT3 on side 3.

4 Side4 CT4 Pri. RatedCurr


Primary rated current of CT4 on side 4.

5 ComWing CT5 Pri RatedCurr


Primary rated current of CT5 of common wingding.

6 Diff. Pickup Curr.


Setting of differential current fault detector. It is the minimum operating setting of differential
protection. It shall be higher than the maximum imbalance current while transformer operates on
normal rated load, i.e.

I cdqd = K rel ( K er + ∆U + ∆m ) I e

where I cdqd represents the setting [Diff. Pickup Curr.].


I e is secondary rated current of transformer;
K rel is reliability coefficient (generally K rel = 1.3 - 1.5);
K er is the ratio errors of CT (=0.03X2, for type 10P; =0.01X2, for class 5P and class TP);
∆U is the maximum deviation (in percentage of rated voltage) due to tap changing;
∆m is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CT at all side, 0.05 is
recommended.

For practical engineering calculation, I cdqd =(0.2 - 0.5)I e is reasonable and imbalance current in
differential scheme during maximum load of transformer shall be measured.
Note: Calculation of differential current settings is based on the secondary rated current of the
transformer. If a setting value got from calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting
shall be divided by secondary rated current of this side of transformer, to get per unit value.

Settings of “Diff. Pickup Curr”, “Inst. Diff. Curr.”(12) and “Diff. CT Superv. Alarm” (13) are all
based on the transformer secondary rated current, and are all per unit value. If a setting got from
calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting shall be divided by its rated current Ie.

7 Diff. Stabilizing Factor


Restraint coefficient of percentage differential protection. The coefficient must ensure that the
restraint current is always greater than the differential currernt in theory while external fault occurs
not taking CT saturation into account.

Setting calculation method of differential protection is provided here only for reference. For
details, please refer to relevant specification and setting calculation guidance.

Calculation of imbalance current is different with different type of transformer. Following


equations are given to calculate the maximum imbalance current Iunb.max (secondary current) in

68 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

differential scheme for common two windings and three windings transformer:

l For two windings transformer

I unb. max = ( K ap K cc K er + ∆U + ∆m ) I k . max

where definition of K er , ∆U and ∆m have been mentioned above;


K cc is the “same type coefficient” (1.0 is considered) of CT;
I k . max is the maximum value of fundamental component of external short circuit (secondary)
current;
K ap is the coefficient of DC component;
K ap = 1.0 if CT at both sides are class TP, or
K ap = 1.5 - 2.0 if CT at both sides are class P.
l For three winding transformer

Take external short circuit fault at LV side as example:

I unb. max = K ap K cc K er I k . max + ∆U h I k . h . max + ∆U m. I k . m. max + ∆m I I k . I . max + ∆m II I k . II . max

where definition of K er , K cc and K ap have been mentioned above;


∆U h and ∆U m are the maximum deviations (in percentage of rated voltage) on HV and
MV sides due to tap changing;
I k . max is the maximum value of fundamental component of short circuit secondary current
flowing through CT at the fault side during external fault at LV side;
I k .h. max and I k .m. max are the fundamental components of secondary currents flowing
through CT at tap changing during this external fault;
I k .I . max and I k .II . max are the fundamental components of secondary currents flowing through
CT at other sides during this fault;
∆m I and ∆mII are errors caused by difference between ratios of CT (auxiliary CT
included) at relevant sides.

Pick up current (secondary current) of differential relay is:

I op . max ≥ K rel I unb. max


where K rel is reliability coefficient (generally K rel = 1.3 - 1.5).

Thus the maximum restraint coefficient is:


K res . max = I op. max / I res . max

where I res . max is the maximum restraint current (secondary current) of various restraint currents
during short circuit fault at each side.

Based on pick up current of differential relay I cdqd , first knee point current I res.01 , maximum
restraint current I res . max and maximum restraint coefficient K res . max , the slope of section 1 of
operation characteristic curve of percentage differential relay, K bl 1 , will be calculated as following:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 69


Chapter 6 Parameters

K res − I cdqd / I res


K bl1 =
1 − I res .01 / I res
When I res. max = I k . max ,

I op. max − I cdqd


K bl1 =
I k . max − I res.01
Therefore, for steady state percentage differential relay, when I res.01 = 0.5 I e , we have:
I op . max − I cdqd
K bl1 =
I k . max − 0.5 I e
l Sensitivity check for percentage differential protection

The sensitivity coefficient K sen shall be calculated according to two phases short circuit on outlet
of transformer protected by the differential relay in minimum operation mode. From the
calculated minimum short circuit current I k . min and relevant restraint current I res , corresponding
pick up current I op will be found in the operation characteristic curve of percentage differential
relay, then the sensitivity coefficient is:

K sen = I k . min / I op
K sen ≥ 1.2 is required.
operation current

Kbl1

Icdqd
restraint current
Ires.01 6 Ie

8 2nd Harm. Stab. Factor


Restraint coefficient of second harmonics. This parameter is the blocking threshold of second
harmonics involving in differential current to against inrush when the transformer is energized.
The differential protection will be blocked when the percentage of second harmonics reaches the
threshold because the percentage of second harmonics is high in inrush current but low in fault
current. It is recommended that the parameter is set to be 15% or so, of course it can be set
comparatively small according to the real transformer itself. Generally, it is greater than 10%.

9 3rd Harm. Stab. Factor


Restraint coefficient of third harmonics. The criteria of checking 3rd harmonics is added to block
differential protection based on the facts that inrush contains 3rd harmonics. It is recommended
to be set as 20%

10 Inst. Diff. Curr.


Setting of unrestrained differential protection. Unrestrained differential protection can clear

70 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

serious internal fault quickly and prevent operation delay caused by CT saturation. Its setting
value I cdsd (i.e. [Inst. Diff. Curr.])shall be higher than inrush current of transformer, generally

I cdsd = K ⋅ I e
where K is a multiple depending on capacity of the transformer and distance of the power
system.

K will be 3.0 - 6.0 for transformer with capacity 40 - 120 MVA and 2.0 - 5.0 for transformer with
capacity above 120 MVA. It is evident that the larger the transformer capacity or the power
system distance, the smaller the K .

Sensitivity coefficient of unrestrained differential protection shall be calculated according to the two
phases short circuit in normal operation condition at installed point of the relay. K sen ≥ 1.2 is
required.

Please note that calculation of unrestrained differential current settings is based on the secondary
rated current of the transformer. If a setting value got from calculation is together with its unit
Ampere, this setting shall be divided by secondary rated current of this side of transformer, to get
per unit value.

11 Diff. CT Superv. Alarm


Current setting of CT circuit supervision alarm. This setting shall be higher than maximum
differential current due to tap of the transformer being not in the middle position or other possible
condition during operation.

12 REF Pickup Curr.


Setting of residual or common-and-serial-windings differential current fault detector. Calculation
of this setting is based on secondary rated current of the transformer. If a setting value got from
calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this setting shall be divided by secondary rated current
of this side of the CT, to get per unit value. The pick up current of residual differential protection
shall be higher than the maximum imbalance current while transformer operates on normal rated
load, i.e.
I 0 cdqd = K rel ( K er + ∆m ) I n

where I 0 cdqd represents for [REF Pickup Curr.];


I n is rated secondary current of CT;
K rel is reliability coefficient (generally K rel = 1.3 - 1.5);
K er is the ratio errors of CT (for type 10P, K er = 0.03×2; for class 5P and class TP,
K er =0.01X2);
∆m is the error caused by the difference between ratios of CT at all side, 0.05 is
recommended.

For practical engineering calculation, I ocdqd =(0.2 - 0.5)I e is reasonable and imbalance e current
in differential scheme during maximum load of transformer shall be measured.

Please note that calculation of residual differential current settings is based on the secondary
rated current of CT. If a setting value got from calculation is together with its unit Ampere, this
setting shall be divided by secondary rated current of this side of CT, to get per unit value.

l Sensitivity check for residual percentage differential protection

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 71


Chapter 6 Parameters

Sensitivity of residual percentage differential protection shall be checked with the solid earthed
short circuit in its protected zone. K sen ≥ 2 is required. In solid earthed system, distribution of
residual current for single phase to ground fault depends on the configuration of residual network
of power system. Magnitude of the single-phase ground fault current depends on not only
residual distance of system but also positive and negative sequence distance or power system
operation mode. When power system is in maintenance status, in order to remain the residual
network unchanged and increase sensitivity for earth fault protection, the 220 kV power system is
generally compensated by properly changing earth mode of the transformer. Neutral point of
transformer of 400 kV power system is now generally earthed with small reactance. Therefore,
sensitivity of residual differential protection shall be checked in minimum operation mode for 220
kV power system and minimum operation mode or small maintenance mode for 400 kV power
system.
Note: For setting calculation of residual percentage differential protection, please refer to 9 setting,
calculation of steady state percentage differential protection. But here ∆U , maximum
deviation due to tap changing within voltage regulation range shall be taken as 0. Polarity of CT
for residual differential protection at each side shall be arranged as shown in fig. 1.2.1 or fig.
1.2.2. Positive polarity of CT is at busbar side on HV and MV sides and at neutral point for
common winding.

13 REF Stabilizing Factor


Restraint coefficient of residual or common-and-serial-windings differential current fault detector.

14 CT Superv. Blk Diff.


Enable differential protection blocked by CT circuit failure.

− Setting “0”: Differential protection is not blocked by CT circuit failure.


− Setting “1”: Differential protection is blocked by CT circuit failure when the differential
current is less than 1.2 Ie, and not blocked when differential current is higher than 1.2 Ie.
− Setting “2”: Differential protection is always blocked by CT circuit failure.

15 CT Superv. Blk REF


Residual or common-and-serial-windings differential protection blocked by CT circuit failure.

16 Inrush Blk Diff.


Inrush current blocking mode. Select criterion of Inrush current detection.

− “0”, discrimination by harmonics;


− “1”, waveform distortion criteria is used.

17 Diff. Prot. TripMatrix


Tripping output logic setting of differential protection which is used to specify which breaker or
breakers will be tripped by this function. This word comprises 16 binary bits as follows and is
expressed by a hexadecimal number of 4 digits from 0000H to FIFTH. The tripping output logic
settings of RCS-978E is specified as follows:

72 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

trip bus sectioner breaker on sides 3/4

trip bus couple breaker on side 2

trip bus couple breaker on side 1

tripping breaker on side 4

tripping breaker on side 3

tripping breaker on side 2

tripping breaker on side 1

protectionenabled
Trip (spare) 4

Trip (spare) 3

Trip (spare) 2

Trip (spare) 1
Trip (spare) 5
function

N/A

N/A

N/A

The bit corresponding to the breaker to be tripped shall be “1” and other bits shall be “0”. For
example, if differential protection is defined to trip bus couple breaker on side 1, the “0” bit and “5”
bit shall be “1” and other bits “0”. Then a hexadecimal number 0021H is formed as the tripping
output logic setting.

Spare tripping bit can be used to trip other breaker not specified yet.

18 Enable Inst. Diff. Prot.


Unrestrained instantaneous differential protection enabled.

19 Enable Percent Diff.Prot.


Percentage differential protection enabled.

20 Enable REF Prot.


Residual or common-and-serial-windings differential protection enabled.

21 Enable DPFC Diff. Prot.


DPFC differential protection enabled. It is suggested to set this logic setting as “1”, so this function
is enabled.

22 OverExci. Ratio Reference


Decide which side is used to calculate OverExci. Ratio.

23 Enable3rd Harm.Blk Diff.


Third harmonics blocking enabled. It is suggested to set this logic setting as “1”, so this function is
enabled.

Caution: When protection settings are set and the maximum value of ratio of calculated rated
current of each side to secondary current of CT on that side is less than 0.4, this will be
considered abnormal and wrong setting alarm will be issued.

When residual protection is enabled, if ratio of maximum and minimum current ratio of
CT related to residual differential current on every side is higher than 4, this will be
considered abnormal and wrong setting alarm will be issued.
Note: It is suggested to set implicit logic setting [differential protection blocked by overexcitation
factor enabled] as “1” by program DBG2000, i.e., this function is enabled.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 73


Chapter 6 Parameters

6.4 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 1

No. Setting Abbreviation(displayed) Range Step


1 Setting of phase current fault detector Pickup Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
2 Setting of calculated residual current fault detector Pickup ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
Setting of directly-measured residual current fault
3 Pickup Extern ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
Detector
4 Setting of “Gap” residual current fault detector Pickup Gap ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
5 Setting of residual voltage fault detector Pickup ZS Volt. 10—220V 0.01V

6 Setting of negative sequence voltage for composite


NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk 2—100V 0.01V
voltage control element
LowVolt. for
7 Setting of low voltage for composite voltage control 2—100V 0.01V
Comp.Volt.Blk
8 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
9 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Delay 1 0—20S 0.01S
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
10 OC Zone1 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 1 with time delay 1.
11 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Delay2 0—20S 0.01S
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
12 OC Zone1 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 1 with time delay 2.
13 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
14 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
15 OC Zone2 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 2 with time delay 1.
16 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
17 OC Zone2 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 2 with time delay 2.
18 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
19 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
20 OC Zone3 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 3 with time delay 1.
21 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
22 OC Zone3 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 3 with time delay 2.
Setting of residual voltage used to block residual
23 ZS Volt. Blk ROC 2—100V 0.01V
overcurrent protection.
24 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 1. ROC Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
25 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 1. ROC Zone1 Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
26 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 1 with time delay 1.
27 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 1. ROC Zone1 Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
28 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 1 with time delay 2.
29 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 2. ROC Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
30 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
31 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay 1.
32 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s

74 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent


33 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay 2.
34 Time delay3 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay3 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
35 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix3 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay3.
36 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 3. ROC Zone3 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
37 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 3. ROC Zone3 Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
38 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 3 with time delay 1.
39 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 3. ROC Zone3 Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
40 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 3 with time delay 2.
Voltage setting of gap residual overvoltage
41 Gap ROV Volt. 10—220V 0.01V
protection (Gap ROV)
42 Time delay 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 1 0—10 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time
43 Gap ROV TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
Delay 1.
44 Time delay 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time
45 Gap ROV TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
Delay 2.
Current setting of Gap residual overcurrent
46 Gap ROC Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
protection (Gap ROC).
47 Time delay 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time
48 Gap ROC TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
delay 1.
49 Time delay 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time
50 Gap ROC TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
delay 2.
Lower limit setting of inverse time overcurrent
51 InvTime OC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
protection.
52 Delay of inverse time overcurrent protection. InvTime OC Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time
53 InvTime OC TripMatrix 0000-FFFFH
overcurrent protection.
Lower limit setting pickup value of inverse time
54 InvTime ROC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
residual overcurrent protection.
Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent
55 InvTime ROC Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
protection.
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time
56 InvTime ROC TripMatrix 0000-FFFFH
residual overcurrent protection.
57 Current setting of overload alarm stage 1. OverLoad Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
58 Delay of overload alarm stage1. OverLoad Zone1 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
59 Current setting of overload alarm stage 2. OverLoad Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
60 Delay of overload alarm stage2. OverLoad Zone2 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
61 Current setting of cooling initiation stage 1. CoolerStart Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
62 Delay of cooling initiation stage 1. CoolerStart Zone1 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
63 Current setting of cooling initiation stage 2. CoolerStart Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
64 Delay of cooling initiation stage 2. CoolerStart Zone2 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
OverLoad Curr Blk
65 Current setting of overload blocking OLTC. TapSwitch 0.05—30In 0.01A
OverLoad Delay Blk
66 Delay of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch] 0—20 s 0.01s
TapSwitch

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 75


Chapter 6 Parameters

Logic settings
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled
67 OC Zone1 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
by composite voltage
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled
68 OC Zone2 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
by composite voltage
Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled
69 OC Zone3 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
by composite voltage
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled
70 OC Zone1 Blk by Direction 0,1
by direction.
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled
71 OC Zone2 Blk by Direction 0,1
by direction.
Direction selection of stage 1 of overcurrent
72 OC Zone1 Direction Option 0,1
protection.
Direction selection of stage 2 of overcurrent
73 OC Zone2 Direction Option 0,1
protection.
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
74 ROC Zone1 Blk by ZSVolt 0,1
controlled by residual voltage
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
75 ROC Zone2 Blk by ZSVolt 0,1
controlled by residual voltage
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
76 ROC Zone1 Blk by Direction 0,1
controlled by direction.
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
77 ROC Zone2 Blk by Direction 0,1
controlled by direction.
Direction selection of stage 1 of residual
78 ROC Stage1 Direction Option 0,1
overcurrent protection.
Direction selection of stage 2 of residual
79 ROC Stage2 Direction Option 0,1
overcurrent protection.
Residual current option for residual
80 ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir. 0,1
direction.
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
81 ROC Zone1 Blk by Harm. 0,1
controlled by harmonic.
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
82 ROC Zone2 Blk by Harm. 0,1
controlled by harmonic.
83 Residual current option for stage1 of ROC. ROC Zone1 ZSCurr Option 0,1
84 Residual current option for stage2 of ROC. ROC Zone2 ZSCurr Option 0,1
85 Gap Protection Option. Gap Protection Option 0,1
86 Stage1 of overload alarm enabled. Enable OverLoad Zone1 0,1
87 Stage2 of overload alarm enabled. Enable OverLoad Zone2 0,1
88 Stage1 of cooling initiation enabled. Enable CoolerStart Zone1 0,1
89 Stage2 of cooling initiation enabled. Enable CoolerStart Zone2 0,1
90 Overload blocking OLTC enabled. Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch 0,1
Protection performance during VT circuit
91 VT Supervision Criterion 0,1
failure.
92 Voltage on local side out of service. VT Out of Service 0,1
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
93 OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 2
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
94 OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 3
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
95 OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 4
Inverse time overcurrent protection
96 InvTime OC Blk by Dir. 0,1
controlled by direction.
Inverse time overcurrent protection direction
97 InvTime OC Direction Opt 0,1
selection.

76 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse


98 InvOC Inherent Delay Opt 0,1
time overcurrent.
Residual current option for stage 1 of
99 InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option 0,1
inverse time residual overcurrent.
Enable inverse time residual overcurrent
100 InvTime ROC Blk by Dir. 0,1
protection controlled by direction
Direction selection of residual overcurrent
101 InvTime ROC Direction Opt 0,1
protection.
Enable additional 100 ms delay for inverse
102 InvROC Inherent Delay Opt 0,1
time residual overcurrent prot.

Explanation of the settings:

1 Pickup_Curr.

Current setting of phase current fault detector. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of
all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

2 Pickup_ZS_Curr.

Current setting of calculated residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io but 3Io. This
setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient
less than 1 (say, 0.95).

3 Pickup Extern ZS Curr.

Current setting of directly-measured residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io but 3Io.
This setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by a
coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

4 Pickup Gap ZS Curr.

Current setting of directly-measured “GAP” residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io
but 3Io. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by
a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

5 Pickup ZS Volt.

Setting of residual voltage fault detector.

6 NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk

Negative sequence voltage setting of composite voltage control element. Setting and displayed
value of negative sequence voltage are U2.

7 LowVolt. for Comp.Volt.Blk

Setting of phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage control element.

8 OC Zone1 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

9 OC Zone1 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 1.

10 OC Zone1 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 with time delay 1. It is as same as

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 77


Chapter 6 Parameters

the one of main protection. The tripping matrix mentioned below is same to this one.

11 OC Zone1 Delay2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 1.

12 OC Zone1 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 with time delay 2.

13 OC Zone2 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

14 OC Zone2 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 2.

15 OC Zone2 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 with time delay 1.

16 OC Zone2 Delay2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 2.

17 OC Zone2 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 with time delay 2.

18 OC Zone3 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

19 OC Zone3 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 3.

20 OC Zone3 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 with time delay 1.

21 OC Zone3 Delay2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 3.

22 OC Zone3 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 with time delay 2.

23 ZS Volt. Blk Roc

Setting of residual voltage which is used to block residual overcurrent protection.

24 ROC Zone1 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 1.

25 ROC Zone1 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 1.

26 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix1

78 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 1 with time delay 1.

27 ROC Zone1 Delay2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 1.

28 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 1 with time delay 2.

29 ROC Zone2 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 2.

30 ROC Zone2 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

31 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay 1.

32 ROC Zone2 Delay2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

33 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay 2.

34 ROC Zone2 Delay3

Time delay 3 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

35 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix3

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay 3.

36 ROC Zone3 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 3.

37 ROC Zone3 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 3.

38 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 3 with time delay 1.

39 ROC Zone3 Delay2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 3.

40 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 3 with time delay 2.

41 Gap ROV Volt.

Voltage setting of gap residual overvoltage protection (Gap ROV)

42 Gap ROV Delay1

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 79


Chapter 6 Parameters

Time delay 1 of Gap ROV

43 Gap ROV TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time delay 1.

44 Gap ROV Delay2

Time delay 2 of Gap ROV

45 Gap ROV TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time delay 2.

46 Gap ROC Curr.

Current setting of Gap residual overcurrent protection (Gap ROC).

47 Gap ROC Delay1

Time delay 1 of Gap ROC

48 Gap ROC TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time delay 1.

49 Gap ROC Delay2

Time delay 2 of Gap ROC

50 Gap ROC TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time delay 2.

51 InvTime OC Curr.

Lower limit setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.

52 InvTime OC Delay

Delay of inverse time overcurrent protection.

53 InvTime OC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.

54 InvTime ROC Curr.

Lower limit setting pickup value of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

55 InvTime ROC Delay

Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

56 InvTime ROC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

57 OverLoad Zone1 Curr.

Current setting of overload alarm stage 1.

58 OverLoad Zone1 Delay

80 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Delay of overload alarm stage 1.

59 OverLoad Zone2 Curr.

Current setting of overload alarm stage 2.

60 OverLoad Zone2 Delay

Delay of overload alarm stage 2.

61 CoolerStart Zone1 Curr.

Current setting of cooling initiation stage 1.

62 CoolerStart Zone1 Delay

Delay of cooling initiation stage 1.

63 CoolerStart Zone2 Curr.

Current setting of cooling initiation stage 2.

64 CoolerStart Zone2 Delay

Delay of cooling initiation stage 2.

65 OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch

Current setting of overload blocking OLTC.

66 OverLoad Delay Blk TapSwitch

Delay of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch]


67 OC Zone1 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

68 OC Zone2 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

69 OC Zone3 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

70 OC Zone1 Blk by Direction

Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

71 OC Zone2 Blk by Direction

Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

72 OC Zone1 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 1 of overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

73 OC Zone2 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 2 of overcurrent protection.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 81


Chapter 6 Parameters

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

74 ROC Zone1 Blk by ZSVolt

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by residual voltage element.

75 ROC Zone2 Blk by ZSVolt

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by residual voltage element

76 ROC Zone1 Blk by Direction

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

77 ROC Zone2 Blk by Direction

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

78 ROC Zone1 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

79 ROC Zone2 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

80 ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir

Residual current option for residual direction.

− “1”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.


− “0” ,use directly-measured residual instead of calculated residual direction.

81 ROC Zone1 Blk by Harm

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic.

82 ROC Zone2 Blk by Harm

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic.

83 ROC Zone1 ZSCurr. Option

Residual current option for stage1 of ROC.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

84 ROC Zone2 ZSCurr. Option

Residual current option for stage2 of ROC.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

82 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

85 Gap Protection Option

If this logic setting is set as “1”, residual overvoltage and residual overcurrent relay will hold
operation status of each other after operating. At this time, time setting and trip matrix of “Gap”
residual overcurrent protection is used not only for itself but also for “Gap” residual overvoltage
protection。

If this logic setting is set as “0”, residual overvoltage and residual overcurrent relay will operate
respectively .

86 Enable Overload Zone1

Stage1 of overload alarm enabled.

87 Enable Overload Zone2

Stage 2 of overload alarm enabled.

88 Enable CoolerStart Zone1

Stage1 of cooling initiation enabled.

89 Enable CoolerStart Zone2

Stage 2 of cooling initiation enabled.

90 Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch

Overload blocking OLTC enabled.

91 VT Supervision Criterion

Protection performance during VT circuit failure.

− “1”: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, directional relay and composite voltage
element at the same side will be disabled but overcurrent relay on the same side can still be
controlled by composite voltage elements of other side if corresponding logic setting is set as
“1”.

− “0”: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, the overcurrent relay will become an
overcurrent relay without directional element and composite voltage element control.

92 VT Out of Service

Voltage on local side out of service.

93 OC Blk by side2 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage on side 2.

94 OC Blk by side3 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage on side 3.

95 OC Blk by side4 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage on side 4.

96 InvTime OC Blk by Dir.

Inverse time overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 83


Chapter 6 Parameters

97 InvTime OC Direction Opt

Inverse time overcurrent protection direction selection.

− “1” direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0” direction points to outside of transformer.

98 InvOC Inherent Delay Opt

Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse time overcurrent.

99 InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option

Residual current option for stage 1 of inverse time residual overcurrent.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

100 InvTime ROC Blk by Dir.

Enable inverse time residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction


101 InvTime ROC Direction Opt

Direction selection of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

InvROC Inherent Delay Opt


Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

6.5 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 2

No. Setting Abbreviation (displayed) Range Step


1 Setting of phase current fault detector Pickup Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
2 Setting of calculated residual current fault detector Pickup ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
Setting of directly-measured residual current fault
3 Pickup Extern ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
Detector
4 Setting of “Gap” residual current fault detector Pickup Gap ZS Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
5 Setting of residual voltage fault detector Pickup ZS Volt. 10—220V 0.01V
Setting of negative sequence voltage for composite
6 NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk 2—100V 0.01V
voltage control element
Setting of negative sequence voltage for composite
7 LowVolt. for Comp.Volt.Blk 2—100V 0.01V
voltage control element
8 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
9 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
10 OC Zone1 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 1 with time delay 1.
11 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 1. OC Zone1 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
12 OC Zone1 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 1 with time delay 2.
13 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
14 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
15 Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent OC Zone2 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH

84 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

protection stage 2 with time delay 1.


16 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 2. OC Zone2 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
17 OC Zone2 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 2 with time delay 2.
18 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
19 Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
20 OC Zone3 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 3 with time delay 1.
21 Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 3. OC Zone3 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
22 OC Zone3 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
protection stage 3 with time delay 2.
Setting of residual voltage used to block residual
23 ZS Volt. Blk ROC 2—100V 0.01V
overcurrent protection.
24 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 1. ROC Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
25 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 1. ROC Zone1 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
26 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 1 with time delay 1.
27 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 1. ROC Zone1 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
28 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 1 with time delay 2.
29 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 2. ROC Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
30 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
31 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay 1.
32 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
33 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay 2.
34 Time delay3 of residual overcurrent stage 2. ROC Zone2 Delay3 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
35 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix3 0000—FIFTH
stage 2 with time delay3.
36 Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 3. ROC Zone3 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
37 Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 3. ROC Zone3 Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
38 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
stage 3 with time delay 1.
39 Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 3. ROC Zone3 Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent
40 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
stage 3 with time delay 2.
Voltage setting of gap residual overvoltage
41 Gap ROV Volt. 10—220V 0.01V
protection (Gap ROV)
42 Time delay 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay1 0—10 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time
43 Gap ROV TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
delay 1.
44 Time delay 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time
45 Gap ROV TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
delay 2.
Current setting of Gap residual overcurrent
46 Gap ROC Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
protection (Gap ROC).
47 Time delay 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay1 0—20 s 0.01s

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 85


Chapter 6 Parameters

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time


48 Gap ROC TripMatrix1 0000—FIFTH
delay 1.
49 Time delay 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 2 0—20 s 0.01s
Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time
50 Gap ROC TripMatrix2 0000—FIFTH
delay 2.
Lower limit setting of inverse time overcurrent
51 InvTime OC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
protection.
52 Delay of inverse time overcurrent protection. InvTime OC Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time
53 InvTime OC TripMatrix 0000-FFFFH
overcurrent protection.
Lower limit setting pickup value of inverse time
54 InvTime ROC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
residual overcurrent protection.
Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent
55 InvTime ROC Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
protection.
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time
56 InvTime ROC TripMatrix 0000-FFFFH
residual overcurrent protection.
57 Current setting of overload alarm stage 1. OverLoad Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
58 Delay of overload alarm stage1. OverLoad Zone1 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
59 Current setting of overload alarm stage 2. OverLoad Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
60 Delay of overload alarm stage2. OverLoad Zone2 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
61 Current setting of cooling initiation stage 1. CoolerStart Zone1 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
62 Delay of cooling initiation stage 1. CoolerStart Zone1 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
63 Current setting of cooling initiation stage 2. CoolerStart Zone2 Curr. 0.05—30In 0.01A
64 Delay of cooling initiation stage 2. CoolerStart Zone2 Delay 0—20 s 0.01s
65 Current setting of overload blocking OLTC. OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch 0.05—30In 0.01A
66 Delay of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch] OverLoad Delay Blk TapSwitch 0—20 s 0.01s
Logic settings
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by
67 OC Zone1 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage element
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by
68 OC Zone2 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage element
Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by
69 OC Zone3 Blk by CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage element
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by
70 OC Zone1 Blk by Direction 0,1
direction.
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by
71 OC Zone2 Blk by Direction 0,1
direction.
Direction selection of stage 1 of overcurrent
72 OC Zone1 Direction Option 0,1
protection.
Direction selection of stage 2 of overcurrent
73 OC Zone2 Direction Option 0,1
protection.
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
74 ROC Zone1 Blk by ZSVolt 0,1
controlled by residual voltage element.
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
75 ROC Zone2 Blk by ZSVolt 0,1
controlled by residual voltage element.
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
76 ROC Zone1 Blk by Direction 0,1
controlled by direction.
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
77 ROC Zone2 Blk by Direction 0,1
controlled by direction.
Direction selection of stage 1 of residual
78 ROC Stage1 Direction Option 0,1
overcurrent protection.

86 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Direction selection of stage 2 of residual


79 ROC Stage2 Direction Option 0,1
overcurrent protection.
80 Residual current option for residual direction. ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir. 0,1
Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection
81 ROC Zone1 Blk by Harm. 0,1
controlled by harmonic.
Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection
82 ROC Zone2 Blk by Harm. 0,1
controlled by harmonic.
83 Residual current option for stage1 of ROC. ROC Zone1 ZSCurr Option 0,1
84 Residual current option for stage2 of ROC. ROC Zone2 ZSCurr Option 0,1
85 Gap Protection Option. Gap Protection Option 0,1
86 Stage1 of overload alarm enabled. Enable OverLoad Zone1 0,1
87 Stage2 of overload alarm enabled. Enable OverLoad Zone2 0,1
88 Stage1 of cooling initiation enabled. Enable CoolerStart Zone1 0,1
89 Stage2 of cooling initiation enabled. Enable CoolerStart Zone2 0,1
90 Overload blocking OLTC enabled. Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch 0,1
91 Protection performance during VT circuit failure. VT Supervision Criterion 0,1
92 Voltage on local side out of service. VT Out of Service 0,1
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
93 OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 1
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
94 OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 3
Enable overcurrent protection controlled by
95 OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt 0,1
composite voltage on side 4
Inverse time overcurrent protection controlled by
96 InvTime OC Blk by Dir. 0,1
direction.
Inverse time overcurrent protection direction
97 InvTime OC Direction Opt 0,1
selection.
Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse time
98 InvOC Inherent Delay Opt 0,1
overcurrent.
Residual current option for stage 1 of inverse
99 InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option 0,1
time residual overcurrent.
Enable inverse time residual overcurrent
100 InvTime ROC Blk by Dir. 0,1
protection controlled by direction
Direction selection of residual overcurrent
101 InvTime ROC Direction Opt 0,1
protection.
Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse time
102 InvROC Inherent Delay Opt 0,1
residual overcurrent protection.

Explanation of the settings:

1 Pickup_Curr.

Current setting of phase current fault detector. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of
all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

2 Pickup_ZS_Curr.

Current setting of calculated residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io but 3Io. This
setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient
less than 1 (say, 0.95).

3 Pickup Extern ZS Curr.

Current setting of directly-measured residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io but 3Io.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 87


Chapter 6 Parameters

This setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by a
coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

4 Pickup Gap ZS Curr.

Current setting of directly-measured “GAP” residual current fault detector. The setting is not Io
but 3Io. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of all overcurrent protection multiplied by
a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

5 Pickup ZS Volt.

Setting of residual voltage fault detector.

6 NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk

Negative sequence voltage setting of composite voltage control element. Setting and displayed
value of negative sequence voltage are U2.

7 LowVolt. for Comp.Volt.Blk

Setting of phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage control element.

8 OC Zone1 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

9 OC Zone1 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 1.

10 OC Zone1 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 with time delay 1. It is as same as
the one of main protection. The tripping matrix mentioned below is same to this one.

11 OC Zone1 Delay 2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 1.

12 OC Zone1 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 with time delay 2.

13 OC Zone2 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

14 OC Zone2 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 2.

15 OC Zone2 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 with time delay 1.

16 OC Zone2 Delay 2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 2.

17 OC Zone2 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 with time delay 2.

88 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

18 OC Zone3 Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

19 OC Zone3 Delay1

Time delay 1 of overcurrent protection stage 3.

20 OC Zone3 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 with time delay 1.

21 OC Zone3 Delay 2

Time delay 2 of overcurrent protection stage 3.

22 OC Zone3 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 with time delay 2.

23 ZS Volt. Blk Roc

Setting of residual voltage which is used to block residual overcurrent protection.

24 ROC Zone1 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 1.

25 ROC Zone1 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 1.

26 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 1 with time delay 1.

27 ROC Zone1 Delay 2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 1.

28 ROC Zone1 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 1 with time delay 2.

29 ROC Zone2 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 2.

30 ROC Zone2 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

31 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay 1.

32 ROC Zone2 Delay2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

33 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay 2.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 89


Chapter 6 Parameters

34 ROC Zone2 Delay3

Time delay3 of residual overcurrent stage 2.

35 ROC Zone2 TripMatrix3

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 2 with time delay3.

36 ROC Zone3 Curr.

Setting of residual overcurrent protection stage 3.

37 ROC Zone3 Delay1

Time delay 1 of residual overcurrent stage 3.

38 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 3 with time delay 1.

39 ROC Zone3 Delay2

Time delay 2 of residual overcurrent stage 3.

40 ROC Zone3 TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of residual overcurrent stage 3 with time delay 2.

41 Gap ROV Volt.

Voltage setting of gap residual overvoltage protection (Gap ROV)

42 Gap ROV Delay1

Time delay 1 of Gap ROV

43 Gap ROV TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time delay 1.

44 Gap ROV Delay2

Time delay 2 of Gap ROV.

45 Gap ROV TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROV with time delay 2.

46 Gap ROC Curr.

Current setting of Gap residual overcurrent protection (Gap ROC).

47 Gap ROC Delay1

Time delay 1 of Gap ROC

48 Gap ROC TripMatrix1

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time delay 1.

49 Gap ROC Delay2

Time delay 2 of Gap ROC

90 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

50 Gap ROC TripMatrix2

Tripping output logic setting of Gap ROC with time delay 2.

51 InvTime OC Curr.

Lower limit setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.

52 InvTime OC Delay

Delay of inverse time overcurrent protection.

53 InvTime OC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of inverse time overcurrent protection.

54 InvTime ROC Curr.

Lower limit setting pickup value of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

55 InvTime ROC Delay

Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

56 InvTime ROC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

57 OverLoad Zone1 Curr.

Current setting of overload alarm stage 1.

58 OverLoad Zone1 Delay

Delay of overload alarm stage1.

59 OverLoad Zone2 Curr.

Current setting of overload alarm stage 2.

60 OverLoad Zone2 Delay

Delay of overload alarm stage2.

61 CoolerStart Zone1 Curr.

Current setting of cooling initiation stage 1.

62 CoolerStart Zone1 Delay

Delay of cooling initiation stage 1.

63 CoolerStart Zone2 Curr.

Current setting of cooling initiation stage 2.

64 CoolerStart Zone2 Delay

Delay of cooling initiation stage 2.

65 OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch

Current setting of overload blocking OLTC.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 91


Chapter 6 Parameters

66 OverLoad Delay Blk TapSwitch

Delay of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch]

67 OC Zone1 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

68 OC Zone2 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

69 OC Zone3 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage element

70 OC Zone1 Blk by Direction

Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

71 OC Zone2 Blk by Direction

Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

72 OC Zone1 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 1 of overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

73 OC Zone2 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 2 of overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

74 ROC Zone1 Blk by ZSVolt

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by residual Voltage Element.

75 ROC Zone2 Blk by ZSVolt

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by residual Voltage Element

76 ROC Zone1 Blk by Direction

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

77 ROC Zone2 Blk by Direction

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

78 ROC Zone1 Direction Option

Direction selection of stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

79 ROC Zone2 Direction Option

92 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

Direction selection of stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

80 ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir

Residual current option for residual direction.

− “1”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.


− “0” ,use directly-measured residual instead of calculated residual direction.

81 ROC Zone1 Blk by Harm

Stage 1 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic.

82 ROC Zone2 Blk by Harm

Stage 2 of residual overcurrent protection controlled by harmonic.

83 ROC Zone1 ZSCurr. Option

Residual current option for stage1 of ROC.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

84 ROC Zone2 ZSCurr. Option

Residual current option for stage2 of ROC.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

85 Gap Protection Option

If this logic setting is set as “1”, residual overvoltage and residual overcurrent relay will hold
operation status of each other after operating. At this time, time setting and trip matrix of “Gap”
residual overcurrent protection is used not only for itself but also for “Gap” residual overvoltage
protection。

If this logic setting is set as “0”, residual overvoltage and residual overcurrent relay will operate
respectively .

86 Enable Overload Zone1

Stage1 of overload alarm enabled.

87 Enable Overload Zone2

Stage2 of overload alarm enabled.

88 Enable CoolerStart Zone1

Stage1 of cooling initiation enabled.

89 Enable CoolerStart Zone2

Stage2 of cooling initiation enabled.

90 Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 93


Chapter 6 Parameters

Overload blocking OLTC enabled.

91 VT Supervision Criterion

Protection performance during VT circuit failure.

− “1”: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, directional relay and composite voltage
element at the same side will be disabled but overcurrent relay on the same side can still be
controlled by composite voltage elements of other side if corresponding logic setting is set as “1”.

− “0”: when VT circuit failure at one side is detected, the overcurrent relay will become an
overcurrent relay without directional element and composite voltage element control

92 VT Out of Service

Voltage on local side out of service.

93 OC Blk by side1 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by Composite Voltage on side1

94 OC Blk by side3 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by Composite Voltage on side3

95 OC Blk by side4 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection controlled by Composite Voltage on side4

96 InvTime OC Blk by Dir.

Inverse time overcurrent protection controlled by direction.

97 InvTime OC Direction Opt

Inverse time overcurrent protection direction selection.

− “1” direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0” direction points to outside of transformer.

98 InvOC Inherent Delay Opt

Enable additional 100ms delay for inverse time overcurrent.

99 InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option

Residual current option for stage 1 of inverse time residual overcurrent.

− “1”, use the calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual current


− “0”, use calculated residual instead of directly-measured residual direction.

100 InvTime ROC Blk by Dir.

Enable inverse time residual overcurrent protection controlled by direction


101 InvTime ROC Direction Opt

Direction selection of residual overcurrent protection.

− “1”, direction points to inside of transformer;


− “0”, direction points to outside of transformer.

94 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

102 nvROC Inherent Delay Opt


Enable additional 100 ms delay for inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

6.6 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 3

No. Setting Abbreviation (displayed) Range Step


1 Setting of phase current fault detector Pickup Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
2 Setting of residual voltage fault detector Pickup ZS Volt. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
Setting of negative sequence voltage for composite
3 NS Volt for CompVolt.Blk 0 – 100V 0.01V
voltage control element
Phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage
4 LowVolt for CompVolt.Blk 0 – 100V 0.01V
control element
5 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Zone1 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
6 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Zone 1 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
7 OC Zone 1 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 1
8 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Zone 2 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
9 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Zone 2 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
10 OC Zone 2 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 2
11 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Zone 3 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
12 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Zone 3 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
13 OC Zone 3 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 3
14 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Zone 4 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
15 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Zone 4 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
16 OC Zone 4 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 4
17 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Zone 5 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
18 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Zone 5 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
19 OC Zone 5 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 5
20 Setting of residual overvoltage protection ROV Volt 2 – 150 V 0.01 V
21 Delay of residual voltage protection ROV Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overvoltage
22 ROV TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
Protection
23 Current setting of overload alarm OverLoad Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
24 Delay of overload alarm OverLoad Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
25 Residual overvoltage alarm ROV Alarm Volt. 2 – 150 V 0.01 V
26 Delay of residual overvoltage alarm ROV Alarm Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Logic settings
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by
27 OC Zone 1 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by
28 OC Zone 2 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 95


Chapter 6 Parameters

Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by


29 OC Zone 3 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 4 of overcurrent protection controlled by
30 OC Zone 4 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 5 of overcurrent protection controlled by
31 OC Stage5 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
32 Overload alarm enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm 0, 1
33 Residual voltage alarm enabled Enable ROV Alarm 0, 1
34 Protection performance during VT circuit failure VT Supervision Criterion 0, 1
35 Voltage on local side out of service VT Out of Service 0, 1
36 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side4 OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt 0,1
37 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side1 OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt 0,1
38 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side2 OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt 0,1

Explanation of the parameter and notice in parameter setting:

1 Pickup Curr.
Current setting of phase current fault detector. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of
all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

2 Pickup ZS Volt.
Voltage setting of residual voltage fault detector. The setting is not Uo but 3Uo. This setting shall
be the minimum setting value of all overvoltage protection times a coefficient less than 1 (say,
0.95).

3 NS Volt. For Comp.Volt.Blk


Negative sequence voltage setting of composite voltage control element. Setting and displayed
value of negative sequence voltage are U2.

4 LowVolt. For Comp.Volt.Blk


Setting of phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage control element.

5 OC Stage1 Curr.
Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

6 OC Stage1 Delay
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 1.

7 OC Stage1 TripMatrix
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

8 OC Stage2 Curr.
Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

9 OC Stage2 Delay
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 2.

10 OC Stage2 TripMatrix
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

11 OC Stage3 Curr.
Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

96 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

12 OC Stage3 Delay
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 3.

13 OC Stage3 TripMatrix
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

14 OC Stage4 Curr.
Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 4.

15 OC Stage4 Delay
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 4.

16 ROC Stage4 TripMatrix


Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 4.

17 OC Stage5 Curr.
Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 5.

18 OC Stage5 Delay
Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 5.

19 OC Stage5 TripMatrix
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 5.

20 ROV Volt.
Voltage setting of residual overvoltage.

21 ROV Delay
Delay of residual overvoltage.

22 ROV TripMatrix
Tripping output logic setting of ROV

23 OverLoad Curr.
Current setting of overload alarm.

24 OverLoad Delay
Delay of overload alarm.

25 ROV Alarm Volt.


Voltage setting of residual overvoltage alarm.

26 ROV Alarm Delay


Delay of residual overvoltage alarm.

27 OC Stage 1 Blk by CompVolt


Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

28 OC Stage 2 Blk by CompVolt


Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

29 OC Stage 3 Blk by CompVolt


Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

30 OC Stage 4 Blk by CompVolt

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 97


Chapter 6 Parameters

Stage 4 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

31 OC Stage 5 Blk by CompVolt


Stage 5 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

32 Enable OverLoad Alarm


Enable overload alarm

33 Enable ROV Alarm


Enable residual overvoltage alarm.

34 VT Supervision Criterion
Protection performance during VT circuit failure.

− “1”, when VT circuit failure at local side is detected, directional relay and composite voltage
element at the same side will be disabled but overcurrent relay on the same side can still be
controlled by composite voltage elements of other side if corresponding logic setting is set as
“1”.
− “0”, when VT circuit failure at local side is detected, the overcurrent relay will become an
overcurrent relay without directional element and composite voltage element control.

35 VT Out of Service
Voltage on local side out of service.

36 OC Blk by side4 CompVolt


Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 4.

37 OC Blk by side1 CompVolt


Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 1.

38 OC Blk by side2 CompVolt


Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 2.

6.7 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 4

No. Setting Abbreviation (displayed) Range Step


1 Setting of phase current fault detector Pickup Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
2 Setting of residual voltage fault detector Pickup ZS Volt. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
Setting of negative sequence voltage for composite
3 NS Volt for CompVolt.Blk 0 – 100V 0.01V
voltage control element
Phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite
4 LowVolt for CompVolt.Blk 0 – 100V 0.01V
voltage control element
5 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Zone1 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
6 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Zone 1 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
7 OC Zone 1 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 1
8 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Zone 2 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
9 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Zone 2 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
10 OC Zone 2 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 2
11 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Zone 3 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A

98 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

12 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Zone 3 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s


Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
13 OC Zone 3 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 3
14 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Zone 4 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
15 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Zone 4 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
16 OC Zone 4 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 4
17 Setting of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Zone 5 Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
18 Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Zone 5 Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent
19 OC Zone 5 TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
protection stage 5
20 Setting of residual overvoltage protection ROV Volt 2 – 150 V 0.01 V
21 Delay of residual voltage protection ROV Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of residual overvoltage
22 ROV TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
Protection
23 Current setting of overload alarm OverLoad Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
24 Delay of overload alarm OverLoad Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
25 Residual overvoltage alarm ROV Alarm Volt. 2 – 150 V 0.01 V
26 Delay of residual overvoltage alarm ROV Alarm Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Logic settings
Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by
27 OC Zone 1 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by
28 OC Zone 2 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by
29 OC Zone 3 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 4 of overcurrent protection controlled by
30 OC Zone 4 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
Stage 5 of overcurrent protection controlled by
31 OC Stage5 Blk by CompVolt 0, 1
composite voltage
32 Overload alarm enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm 0, 1
33 Residual voltage alarm enabled Enable ROV Alarm 0, 1
34 Protection performance during VT circuit failure VT Supervision Criterion 0, 1
35 Voltage on local side out of service VT Out of Service 0, 1
36 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side3 OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt 0,1
37 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side1 OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt 0,1
38 OC Blocked by Composite Voltage on side2 OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt 0,1

Explanation of the parameter and notice in parameter setting:

1 Pickup Curr.

Current setting of phase current fault detector. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of
all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

2 Pickup ZS Volt.

Voltage setting of residual voltage fault detector. The setting is not Uo but 3Uo. This setting
shall be the minimum setting value of all overvoltage protection times a coefficient less than 1 (say,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 99


Chapter 6 Parameters

0.95).

3 NS Volt. For Comp.Volt.Blk

Negative sequence voltage setting of composite voltage control element. Setting and displayed
value of negative sequence voltage are U2.

4 LowVolt. For Comp.Volt.Blk

Setting of phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage control element.

5 OC Stage1 Curr.

Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

6 OC Stage1 Delay

Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 1.

7 OC Stage1 TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1.

8 OC Stage2 Curr.

Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

9 OC Stage2 Delay

Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 2.

10 OC Stage2 TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2.

11 OC Stage3 Curr.

Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

12 OC Stage3 Delay

Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 3.

13 OC Stage3 TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3.

14 OC Stage4 Curr.

Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 4.

15 OC Stage4 Delay

Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 4.

16 ROC Stage4 TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 4.

17 OC Stage5 Curr.

Setting of current setting of overcurrent protection stage 5.

100 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

18 OC Stage5 Delay

Time delay of overcurrent protection stage 5.

19 OC Stage5 TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 5.

20 ROV Volt.

Voltage setting of residual overvoltage.

21 ROV Delay

Delay of residual overvoltage.

22 ROV TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of ROV

23 OverLoad Curr.

Current setting of overload alarm.

24 OverLoad Delay

Delay of overload alarm.

25 ROV Alarm Volt.

Voltage setting of residual overvoltage alarm.

26 ROV Alarm Delay

Delay of residual overvoltage alarm.

27 OC Stage1 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 1 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

28 OC Stage2 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 2 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

29 OC Stage3 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 3 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

30 OC Stage4 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 4 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

31 OC Stage5 Blk by CompVolt

Stage 5 of overcurrent protection controlled by composite voltage.

32 Enable OverLoad Alarm

Enable overload alarm

33 Enable ROV Alarm

Enable residual overvoltage alarm.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 101


Chapter 6 Parameters

34 VT Supervision Criterion

Protection performance during VT circuit failure.

− “1”, when VT circuit failure at local side is detected, directional relay and composite voltage
element at the same side will be disabled but overcurrent relay on the same side can still be
controlled by composite voltage elements of other side if corresponding logic setting is set as
“1”.
− “0”, when VT circuit failure at local side is detected, the overcurrent relay will become an
overcurrent relay without directional element and composite voltage element control.

35 VT Out of Service

Voltage on local side out of service.

36 OC Blk by side4 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 4.

37 OC Blk by side1 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 1.

38 OC Blk by side2 CompVolt

Enable overcurrent protection blocked by composite voltage on side 2.

6.8 Settings of Backup Protection of Common Winding

No. Setting Abbreviation(displayed) Range Step


1 Setting of phase current fault detector Pickup Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
2 Setting of residual current fault detector Pickup ZS Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
3 Setting of residual current protection ROC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
4 Delay of residual current protection ROC Delay 0 – 100s 0.01s
5 Tripping output logic setting of residual current protection ROC TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
6 Lower limit setting of inverse time residual overcurrent prot. InvTime ROC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
7 Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent protection InvTime ROC Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
Tripping output logic setting of inverse time residual over-
8 InvTime ROC TripMatrix 0000-FFFFH
current protection
9 Setting of overcurrent protection OC Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
10 Delay of overcurrent protection OC Delay 0 – 100s 0.01 s
11 Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection OC TripMatrix 0000- FIFTH
12 Setting of overload alarm OverLoad Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
13 Delay of overload alarm OverLoad Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
14 Setting of cooling initiation CoolerStart Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
15 Delay of cooling initiation CoolerStart Delay 0 s – 20 s 0.01 s
16 Setting of residual current alarm ROC Alarm Curr. 0.05 – 30 In 0.01 A
17 Delay of residual current alarm ROC Alarm Delay 0 – 100s 0.01s
Logic settings
18 Overload protection enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm 0, 1

102 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 6 Parameters

19 Cooling initiation enabled Enable cooler Start 0, 1


20 Residual overcurrent alarm enabled Enable Roc Alarm 0, 1
21 Residual overcurrent protection blocked by harmonics ROC Blk by Harm 0, 1
22 Single phase CT or three phases CT option Three phase curr. 0, 1
Enable additional 100 ms delay for inverse time residual
23 InvROC Inherent Delay Opt 0, 1
Overcurrent

Explanation of the parameter and notice in parameter setting:

1 Pickup Curr.

Current setting of phase current fault detector. This setting shall be the minimum setting value of
all overcurrent protection multiplied by a coefficient less than 1 (say, 0.95).

2 Pickup ZS Curr.

Setting of residual current fault detector.

3 Roc Curr.

Setting of residual current protection.

4 ROC Delay

Delay of residual current protection.

5 ROC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of residual current protection.

6 InvTime ROC Curr.

Lower limit setting of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

7 InvTime ROC Delay

Delay of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

8 InvTime ROC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

9 OC Curr.

Setting of overcurrent protection.

10 OC Delay

Delay of overcurrent protection.

11 OC TripMatrix

Tripping output logic setting of overcurrent protection.

12 OverLoad Curr.

Setting of overload alarm.

13 OverLoad Delay

Delay of overload alarm.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 103


Chapter 6 Parameters

14 CoolerStart Curr.

Setting of cooling initiation.

15 CoolerStart Delay

Delay of cooling initiation.

16 ROC Alarm Curr.

Setting of residual current alarm.

17 ROC Alarm Delay

Delay of residual current alarm.

18 Enable OverLoad Alarm

Overload protection enabled.

19 Enable cooler Start

Cooling initiation enabled.

20 Enable ROC Alarm

Residual overcurrent alarm enabled.

21 ROC Blk by Harm

Residual overcurrent protection blocked by harmonics.

22 Three phase curr.

Single phase CT or three phases CT option.

23 InvROC Inherent Delay Opt

Enable additional 100 ms delay for inverse time residual overcurrent protection.

104 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

7.1 General

The human-machine interface consists of a human-machine interface (HMI) module which


provides a communication as simple as possible for the user.

The HMI module includes:

− A 240×128 dot matrix backlight LCD displayer visible in dim lighting conditions, used for
programming, monitoring, status, fault diagnostics and setting, etc. Diagnostic messages
are displayed when there is a trip or alarm condition;
− Several LED indicators;
− Keypad and command keys for full access to the relay.

RCS- 978
DIGITAL TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

1 2 3

HEALTHY
978E 3.00 2000-01-19 10:28:03 区号: 0
ALARM

DIA: 000.01Ie TRIP


001.52A
DIB: 000.01Ie
DIC: 000.01Ie
DI0: 000.01In

U/F: 01.000
F: 050.00Hz

001.02A U1: 057.70V


U2: 057.70V
000.21A 000.22A U3: 057.70V
U4: 057.70V

SIG RESET

4 5

NARI-REALYS ELECTRIC CO. LTD

Fig. 7.1.1 LCD, LED and keypad on the front plate

1 LCD displayer
2 Status indication LEDs
3 ENT, ESC, GRP and navigation buttons
4 DB-9 RS232 port for communication with dedicated test set HELP-90A or a PC for interrogation,
downloading setting files, etc.
5 DB-15 connector for AC inputs from HELP-90A during commissioning

7.1.1 Functionality
The HMI module helps to draw your attention to something that has occurred which may activate a
LED or a report display on the LCD.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 105


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

You as the operator may of own interest view a certain data.

Use menus navigate through menu commands and to locate the data of interest.

7.1.2 Keypad

GRP
ESC

Fig. 7.1.2 Keypad and keys

1 Arrow “3”,“4”,“5”,“6” move between selectable branches of the menu tree.


2 “+”, “-“ change parameter or setting values
3 ENT provide enter/execute function
4 GRP setting group selection
5 ESC exit from the present level in the menu tree.

Note: Any setting change operation should complete with pressing “+”, “3”, “5”, “-“, “ENT” in
sequence, as a password.
Any report delete operation should executed by pressing “+”, “-“, “+”, “-“, “ENT” in sequence.

7.1.3 LED indicators

Fig. 7.1.3 LED indicators

Steady green when the equipment is normally in service. Off when the equipment is
HEALTHY
out of DC power supply or any hardware defect is detected during self check.
Off under normal operation condition while turn to steady yellow when an alarm is given.
ALARM However, if CT circuit failure occurs, it will not turn off until the equipment has returned
to normal condition by manually reset.
Off under normal operation condition while turn to steady red when the equipment picks
TRIP up and tripping command is issued. It turns off only when button “SIG RESET” on the
protection panel has been pressed or remote reset command has been received.

106 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

Tripping LED is controlled by magnetic latched relay, and can only be reset by pressing the ‘SIG
RESET’ key under these LED indicators or by remote reset signal.

7.2 Descriptions of Display on LCD

7.2.1 Normal operation status report


During normal operation condition, the equipment will display following connection diagram of the
transformer and related information on its LCD.

version number 978E 3.00 2000-01-19 10:28:03 区号: 0 present group number
date and time
DIA: 000.01Ie
001.52A differential current
DIB: 000.01Ie of various phases
connection diagram
of transformer DIC: 000.01Ie
zero sequence
DI0: 000.01In differential current
direction of power
U/F: 01.000 overexcitation factor
flow and mean
current values of F: 050.00Hz power frequency
various sides
001.02A U1: 057.70V
U2: 057.70V average values of
average values of 000.21A 000.22A U3: 057.70V sampled voltages
sampled current on each side
U4: 057.70V
on each side

Fig. 7.2.1 Display of normal operation status report

Upper part displays type and version of the equipment and real time. The right side displays
present group number of the settings.

Through 5 items in the displaying control menu: “Transformer Type (2W/3W/AUTO)”, “LVSide
Branch Set (DB/SL/SR)”, “HVSide Connection Mode (Y/Δ)”, “MVSide Connection Mode(Y/Δ)” and
“LVSide Connection Mode(Y/Δ)”. Further information can be displayed on LCD. Details about
displaying control are described in chapter 9.
7.2.2 Operation report
l Operation report (OPERATION REPORT)
Once the protection equipment operates, the LCD will display protection trip report automatically.
If abnormality is detected by self-diagnosis, abnormality report will be displayed also.

Fig. 7.2.2 Display of operation report

The first row of the trip report is serial number and title of the report. The second row is the real

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 107


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

time of tripping report: year–month-date and hour:minute:second:millisecond. The third to fifth


rows are the relative operation time, the faulty phase and a simplified description of protective
element that operates.

If more rows are needed to show the protective elements that operates, these rows will be scrolled
upward cyclically and a scroll bar appears on the right side of the displaying. A black mark on the
scroll bar shows relative position of the displayed rows to total rows.

All of the operation report items that may be displayed are listed as following:

No. Items displayed Description


1 ComWind OC Prot Backup overcurrent protection of common winding operates
2 ComWind ROC Prot. Backup residual overcurrent protection of common winding operates
3 ComWind InvTime ROC Prot Residual overcurrent protection of common winding operates
4 DPFC Diff. Prot. DPFC differential protection operates
5 Inst. Diff. Prot. Instantaneous differential protection operates
6 Percent Diff. Prot. Percentage differential protection operates
7 Inst. ResEarthFault Prot Instantaneous residual differential protection of common winding operates
8 Ratio ResEarthFault Prot Residual differential current of common winding operates
9 Side1 ROV Prot. T1 Residual overvoltage protection with time delay 1 on side 1 operates
10 Side1 ROV Prot. T2 Residual overvoltage protection with time delay 2 on side 1 operates
11 Side1 Gap OC Prot. T1 “Gap” residual overvoltage protection with time delay 1 on side 1operates
12 Side1 Gap OC Prot. T2 “Gap” residual overvoltage protection with time delay 2 on side 1 operates
13 Side1 OC Prot. T11 Residual overcurrent stage1 protecton with time delay 1 on side 1operates
14 Side1 OC Prot. T12 Residual overcurrent stage1 protecton with time delay 2 on side 1operates
15 Side1 OC Prot. T21 Residual overcurrent stage2 protecton with time delay 1 on side 1operates
16 Side1 OC Prot. T22 Residual overcurrent stage2 protecton with time delay 2 on side 1operates
17 Side1 OC Prot. T31 Residual overcurrent stage3 protecton with time delay 1 on side 1operates
18 Side1 OC Prot. T32 Residual overcurrent stage3 protecton with time delay 2 on side 1operates
19 Side1 ROC Prot. T11 Residual overcurrent stage1 protecton with time delay 1 on side 1 operates
20 Side1 ROC Prot. T12 Residual overcurrent stage1 protection with time delay 2 on side 1 operates
21 Side1 ROC Prot. T21 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay 1 on side1 operates
22 Side1 ROC Prot. T22 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay 2 on side 1 operates
23 Side1 ROC Prot. T23 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay3 operates
24 Side1 ROC Prot. T31 Residual overcurrent stage3 protection with time delay 1 on side 1 operates
25 Side1 ROC Prot. T32 Residual overcurrent stage3 protection with time delay 2 on side 1 operates
26 Side1 Gap OVOC Prot. T1 “Gap” overcurrent or overvoltage stage1 protection on side1 operates
27 Side1 Gap OVOC Prot. T2 “Gap” overcurrent or overvoltage stage2 protection on side1 operates
28 Side1 InvTime ROC Prot. Inverse time residual overcurrent protection on side 1 operates
29 Side1 InvTime OC Prot. Inverse time overcurrent protection on side 1 operates
30 Side2 ROV Prot. T1 Residual overvoltage protection with time delay 1 on side 2 operates
31 Side2 ROV Prot. T2 Residual voltage protection on side 2 operates
32 Side2 Gap OC Prot. T1 “Gap” residual overvoltage protection with time delay 1 on side 2 operates
33 Side2 Gap OC Prot. T2 Time stage 2 of “Gap” residual voltage protection on side 2 operates
34 Side2 OC Prot. T11 Residual overcurrent stage1 protecton with time delay 1 on side2 operates

108 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

35 Side2 OC Prot. T12 Residual overcurrent stage1 protecton with time delay 2 on side2 operates
36 Side2 OC Prot. T21 Residual overcurrent stage2 protecton with time delay 1 on side2 operates
37 Side2 OC Prot. T22 Residual overcurrent stage2 protecton with time delay 2 on side2 operates
38 Side2 OC Prot. T31 Residual overcurrent stage3 protecton with time delay 1 on side2 operates
39 Side2 OC Prot. T32 Residual overcurrent stage3 protecton with time delay 2 on side2 operates
40 Side2 ROC Prot. T11 Residual overcurrent stage1 protection with time delay 1 on side 2 operates
41 Side2 ROC Prot. T12 Residual overcurrent stage1 protection with time delay 2 on side2 operates
42 Side2 ROC Prot. T21 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay 1 on side2 operates
43 Side2 ROC Prot. T22 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay 2 on side2 operates
44 Side2 ROC Prot. T23 Residual overcurrent stage2 protection with time delay3 on side 2 operates
45 Side2 ROC Prot. T31 Residual overcurrent stage3 protection with time delay 1 on side2 operates
46 Side2 ROC Prot. T32 Residual overcurrent stage3 protection with time delay 2 on side2 operates
47 Side2 Gap OVOC Prot. T1 “Gap” overcurrent or overvoltage stage1 protection on side2 operates
48 Side2 Gap OVOC Prot. T2 “Gap” overcurrent or overvoltage stage2 protection on side2 operates
49 Side2 InvTime ROC Prot. Inverse time residual overcurrent protection on side 2 operates
50 Side2 InvTime OC Prot. Inverse time overcurrent protection on side 2 operates
51 Side3 OC Prot. T1 Overcurrent stage1 protection on side 3 operates
52 Side3 OC Prot. T2 Overcurrent stage2 protection on side 3 operates
53 Side3 OC Prot. T3 Overcurrent stage3 protection on side 3 operates
54 Side3 OC Prot. T4 Overcurrent stage4 protection on side 3 operates
55 Side3 OC Prot. T5 Overcurrent stage5 protection on side 3 operates
56 Side3 ROV Prot. Residual overvoltage on side 3 protection operates
57 Side4 OC Prot. T1 Overcurrent stage1 protection on side 4 operates
58 Side4 OC Prot. T2 Overcurrent stage2 protection on side 4 operates
59 Side4 OC Prot. T3 Overcurrent stage3 protection on side 4 operates
60 Side4 OC Prot. T4 Overcurrent stage4 protection on side 4 operates
61 Side4 OC Prot. T5 Overcurrent stage5 protection on side 4 operates
62 Side4 ROV Prot. Residual overvoltage on side 4 protection operates
63 Test Trip Breaker circuit trip test

l Operation report (OPERATION REPORT) and abnormality report (AUTOSUPERV


REPORT)

If operation report and abnormality report are created simultaneously, both of them will be
displayed together as follows:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 109


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

Fig.7.2.3 Display of operation report with autosupervision report

This display is similar with that of operation report except that it is divided into two parts while the
upper part is operation report and the lower part abnormality report.

7.2.3 Abnormality report (AUTOSUPERV REPORT)


If abnormality is detected, abnormality report will be displayed at once. Format of abnormality
report is the same as that of operation report.

The following table lists all the abnormality report items that may be displayed on LCD. For
suggested actions against these abnormalities, please refer to chapter 8.

No. Items displayed Description


1 BinaryOutputModule Alarm Output driving transistor damaged.
2 CPU RAM Failure CPU module RAM damaged.
3 CPU EPROM Error CPU module flash memory damaged.
4 CPU Setting Error CPU module EEPROM damaged.
Protection setting has not been modified after modification of rated
5 Settings Invalid
secondary current.
6 Modify settings In the course of modifying settings
7 Opt-coupler Power Loss Power supply of opto-coupler is off.
8 Inner Comm. Alarm CPU module cannot communicate with MON module.
9 CPU DSP Error CPU module DSP damaged.
10 CPU Defective Pickup Initiation pickup of fault detector in CPU module lasted more than 10 s.
Disagreement between operation of corresponding fault detectors in module
11 Inconsistent Pickup
CPU and MON.
12 CPU Drive Test Alarm Test for tripping begins in CPU module.
CT circuit of differential circuit or residual differential circuit fails. Position of
13 CT Supervision
fault has not been found.
14 ComWind CT Superv. Alarm CT circuit or sampling circuit of common winding is abnormal.
15 Side4 CT Superv.Alarm CT circuit or sampling circuit of side 4 is abnormal.
16 Side3 CT Superv.Alarm CT circuit or sampling circuit of side 3 is abnormal.
17 Side2 CT Superv.Alarm CT circuit or sampling circuit of side 2 is abnormal.
18 Side1 CT Superv.Alarm CT circuit or sampling circuit of side 1 is abnormal.
19 Side4 VT Superv. Alarm VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 4 is abnormal.

110 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

20 Side3 VT Superv. Alarm VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 3 is abnormal.


21 Side2 VT Superv. Alarm VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 2 is abnormal.
22 Side1 VT Superv. Alarm VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 1 is abnormal.
23 REF Superv. Alarm Differential current of residual differential relay is abnormal.
24 Diff. Superv. Alarm Differential current of differential relay is abnormal.
25 Side4 Rov Alarm Residual voltage on side 4 alarm
26 Side3 Rov Alarm Residual voltage on side 3 alarm
27 ComWind CT Supervision CT circuit of common winding fails.
28 Side 4 CT Supervision CT circuit on side 4 fails.
29 Side 3 CT Supervision CT circuit on side 3 fails.
30 Side 2 CT Supervision CT circuit on side 2 fails.
31 Side 1 CT Supervision CT circuit on side 1 fails.
32 Side2 OL Blk TapSwitch Overload on side 2 blocking OLTC picks up
33 Side1 OL Blk TapSwitch Overload on side 1 blocking OLTC picks up
34 ComWind Cooler Startup Cooling initiation of common winding picks up
35 Side2 Cooler Startup T2 Stage2 of cooling initiation on side 2 picks up.
36 Side2 Cooler Startup T1 Stage1 of cooling initiation on side 2 picks up.
37 Side1 Cooler Startup T2 Stage2 of cooling initiation on side 1 picks up.
38 Side1 Cooler Startup T1 Stage2 of cooling initiation on side 1 picks up.
39 ComWind OverLoad Overload alarm of common winding picks up.
40 LVside OverLoad Overload alarm on LV side picks up.
41 Side 4 OverLoad Overload alarm on side 4 picks up.
42 Side 3 OverLoad Overload alarm on side 3 picks up.
43 Side 2 OverLoad T2 Overload alarm stage 2 on side 2 picks up.
44 Side 2 OverLoad T1 Overload alarm stage 1 on side 2 picks up.
45 Side 1 OverLoad T2 Overload alarm stage 2 on side 1 picks up.
46 Side 1 OverLoad T1 Overload alarm stage 1 on side 1 picks up.
47 Side2 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 2 picks up.
48 Side1 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 1 picks up.
49 Side4 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 4 picks up.
50 Side3 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 3 picks up.
51 ComWind ROC Alarm Residual current of common winding alarm
52 MON RAM Failure MON module RAM damaged.
53 MON EPROM Error MON module flash memory damaged.
54 MON Setting Error MON module EEPROM damaged.
55 Side2 InvTime ROC Pickup Inverse time residual overcurrent on side 2 picks up.
56 Side2 InvTime OC Pickup Inverse time overcurrent on side 2 picks up.
57 Side1 InvTime ROC Pickup Inverse time residual overcurrent on side 1 picks up.
58 Side1 InvTime OC Pickup Inverse time overcurrent on side 1 picks up.
59 ComSide 1nv ROC Pickup Inverse time residual overcurrent of common wingding picks up.
60 MON DSP Error MON module DSP damaged.
61 MON Defective Pickup Initiation of fault detector in MON module lasts for more than 10 s.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 111


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

62 MON Drive Test alarm Test for tripping in MON module begins.

7.2.4 Change of binary input report (BINCHANGE REPORT)


When any binary input changes, a new report on change of status will be automatically displayed
on LCD as follows. The LCD will resume its original displaying after 5 s approximately.

Fig. 7.2.4 Display of binary change report

If SIG RESET button on protection panel is pressed more than 1 s the LCD display will switch over
between OPERATION REPORT, AUTOSUPURV REPORT and connection diagram of the
transformer.

The following table lists all the binary input change report items that may be displayed.

No. Items displayed Description


1 Side2 Gap Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling Gap protection on side 2
2 Side3 OC Prot Contact Binary input of enabling overcurrent backup protection on side 3
3 Side4 OC Prot Contact Binary input of enabling overcurrent backup protection on side 4
4 ComWind BakProt. Contact Binary input of enabling backup protection of common winding
5 Side4 VT Out of Service VT out-of-service on side 4
6 Side3 VT Out of Service VT out-of-service on side 3
7 Side2 VT Out of Service VT out-of-service on side 2
8 Side1 VT Out of Service VT out-of-service on side 1
9 Diff. Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling differential protection
Binary input of enabling residual differential protection or common-and-
10 REF Prot. Contact
serial-windings differential protection
11 Backup ContactInput5 Spare binary input 5
12 Side1 OC Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling overcurrent protection on side 1
13 Side1 ROC Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling residual overcurrent protection on side 1
14 Side1 Gap Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling Gap protection on side 1
15 Side2 OC Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling over current protection on side 2
16 Side2 ROC Prot. Contact Binary input of enabling residual overcurrent on side 2
17 Backup ContactInput4 Spare binary input 4
18 Backup ContactInput3 Spare binary input 3
19 Backup ContactInput2 Spare binary input 2
20 Reset Signal Button of reset
21 BinaryOutput Supervision Trip output driving transistor status, “1” means damaged.

112 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

22 Opt-coupler Supervision Power supply of opto-coupler status, “1” means power supply is lost.
23 Side1 BreakerOff Breaker position on side 1, “1” means open status.
24 Side2 BreakerOff Breaker position on side 2, “1” means open status.
Binary input of Maintenance status, the equipment will not send messages
25 Monitor Comm. Blk to substation automation system through communication ports when the
binary input is connected.
26 Print BinaryInput Button of printer starting
Power supply supervision. It represent failure of power supply when this
27 PowerOpt-coupler Superv.
binary input changes to “1” from “0”
Pickup of common winding protection in MON module. It is an internally
28 Mon ComWind Prot. Pickup
generated binary status.
Timer start of inverse time residual overcurrent protection on side 2. It is
29 Side2 Inv ROC Timer Start
an internally generated binary status.
Timer start of inverse time overcurrent protection on side 2. It is an
30 Side2 Inv OC Timer Start
internally generated binary status.
Timer start of inverse time residual overcurrent protection on side 1. It is
31 Side1 Inv ROC Timer Start
an internally generated binary status.
Timer start of inverse time overcurrent protection on side 1. It is an
32 Side1 Inv OC Timer Start
internally generated binary status.
Timer start of inverse time overcurrent protection of common winding. It
33 CS Inv ROC Timer Start
is an internally generated binary status.
Pickup of differential current element in MON module. It is an internally
34 Mon Diff. Prot. Pickup
generated binary status.
Pickup of DPFC differential current element in MON module. It is an
35 Mon DPFC Prot. Pickup
internally generated binary status.
Pickup of side differential current element in MON module. It is an
36 Mon REF Prot. Pickup
internally generated binary status.
Mon Test Trip Pickup Test trip test begins in MON module. It is an internally generated binary
37 status.
Pickup of backup protection on side 1 in MON module. It is an internally
38 Mon Side1 BakProt Pickup
generated binary status.
Pickup of backup protection on side 2 in MON module. It is an internally
39 Mon Side2 BakProt Pickup
generated binary status.
Pickup of backup protection on side 3 in MON module. It is an internally
40 Mon Side3 BakProt Pickup
generated binary status.
Pickup of backup protection on side 4 in MON module. It is an internally
41 Mon Side4 BakProt Pickup
generated binary status.

Besides, the equipment provides a series of command menu for protection engineers to test the
device and to modify settings.

Press RST key on the protection panel longer than 1 s, latest trip report, abnormality report and
bus bar configuration diagram will be displayed in turn.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 113


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

7.3 Command Menu

7.3.1 General
This part presents the main layout of the menu tree for the local human-machine interface (HMI).
The menu tree includes menus for:

− PresentValue
− Report
− Print
− Settings
− Clock
− IdentityNo
− Debug
− Display
In order to enter the MAIN MENU, please press “ESC” button under the DEFAULT DISPLAY
condition(displaying connection diagram). If the current display is the latest ‘report display’ or
abnormality report, please press “SIG REST” button to return to the DEFAULT DISPLAY, or
directly press “ESC” button to enter the MAIN MENU.

The main menu is an imitation of Windows start menu and is shown as follows:

Fig. 7.2.1 Display of command menu

In the main menu, the highlighted submenu is activated. If this is marked with ►, move cursor on
it and press ►key, lower level submenu will be popped. Press ◄ key to return to upper level
submenu. Key ▲ or ▼ is used to scroll submenu in the main menu upward or downward
cyclically.

7.3.2 Command menu of RCS-978E


7.3.2.1 The command menu structure tree of RCS-978E

Besides operation and abnormality reports, the equipment provides command menu for test and
configuration. Tree directory of the command menu is shown as follows:

114 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

Main Menu

VALUES CPU VALUES CPU MEASURE


REPORT MON VALUES CPU STATUS
PRINT CPU DIFCUR
OPERATION REPORT
SETTING CPU CALCSET
CLOCK AUTOSUPERV REPORT
BINCHANGE REPORT
IDENTNO CONTACT INPUT
DEBUG
OTHER INPUT
MON MEASURE
DISPLAY
MON STATUS
SIDE1 MEASURE
MON DIFCUR
COMM STATUS SIDE2 MEASURE
MON ANGLE
MEMORY DEBUG SIDE3 MEASURE
TOTAL SETTINGS SIDE4 MEASURE
SETTINGS
EQUIPMENT SETTINGS COMWIND MEASURE
OPERATION REPORT SYSTEM SETTINGS DIF ADJUST CUR
AUTOSUPERV REPORT
MAIN PROT SETTINGS ZSDIF ADJUST CUR
BINCHANGE REPORT SIDE1 SETTINGS OVEREXCI MEASURE
PRESENT OSCILLOG SIDE2 SETTINGS
same as CPU MEASURE
SIDE3 SETTINGS
OSCILLOGRAPHY same as CPU STATUS
SIDE4 SETTINGS
BINARY INPUT
COMWIND SETTINGS
PHASE ANGLE CUR&CUR PHASE ANGLE
CALC DIF SETTINGS
DIF CUR OSCILLO VOL&VOL PHASE ANGLE
TRIP MATRIX
SIDE1 OSCILLO VOL&CUR PHASE ANGLE
RECENT MODIFY SET
SIDE2 OSCILLO ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE
OTHER GRP SETTINGS
SIDE3 OSCILLO ZS ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE
SIDE4 OSCILLO OPERATION REPORT
ZSDIF OSCILLO DIFCUR OSCILLO
COMWIND OSCIL
SIDE1 OSCILLO
SIDE2 OSCILLO
SIDE3 OSCILLO
SIDE4 OSCILLO
ZSDIF OSCILLO
COMWIND OSCILLO

Fig. 7.3.2 Tree directory of command menu

The following is the detail description of each submenu.

7.3.2.2 VALUES menu

This menu is used to display real time AC voltage and current sampled value, phase angle, binary
inputs and calculated differential protection settings of the equipment. These data reflect
comprehensive operation condition of the equipment.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 115


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

These data are generally consistent with indication of voltmeter and ammeter in control room
when the equipment operates normally. Programming and maintenance works of the equipment
will be more convenient by using this menu.

This menu comprises two submenus:

− CPUVALUES
− MONVALUES
l CPUVALUES
This submenu is used to display data acquired by CPU module, including AC voltage and current
value, binary inputs and calculated differential protection settings.

The AC sampled data that are displayed in this submenu is listed below:

The sampled value of current and voltage on side 1, access path is

“VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE1 MEASURE”.


The sampled value of current and voltage on side 2, access path is
“VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE2 MEASURE”.
The sampled value of current and voltage on side 3, access path is
“VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE3 MEASURE”.
The sampled value of current and voltage on side 4, access path is
“VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE4 MEASURE”.
The sampled value of current and voltage of common winding, access path is
“VALUES(CPU VALUES(CPU MEASURE(COMWIND MEASURE”.
The corrected current of differential protection, access path is
“VALUES(CPU VALUES(CPU MEASURE(DIF ADJUST MEASURE”.
The corrected residual current of residual differential protection, access path is
“VALUES(CPU VALUES(CPU MEASURE(ZS ADJUST MEASURE”.
The calculated value of overexcitation, access path is
“VALUES(CPU VALUES(CPU MEASURE(OVEREXICI MEASURE”.
The binary input displayed in this submenu is listed below, as to binary input, “1” means that the
binary input picks up, while “0” means the contrary.
The binary inputs that enable kinds of function, access path is
“VALUES(CPU VALUES(CPU STATUS(CONTACT INPUT”.
Other binary inputs, access path is
“Values(Cpu Values( CPU STATUS(OTHER INPUT”.
Also the calculated differential current is displayed in this submenu that can be accessed through
path
“VALUES(CPU VALUES( CPU DIFCUR”.
And calculated settings by the equipment can be accessed through path
“VALUES(CPU VALUES( CPU CALCSET”.
In normal conditions these displayed values should be consistent with the real values. It is a very
convenient method for site engineers to access important information during the test and
maintenance.

l MONVALUES
This submenu is used to display data acquired by MON module, including AC voltage and current

116 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

value, phase angle and binary inputs. It is similar with CPU VALUES mentioned above. Except
that the fourth submenu “CPU CALCSET” is replaced by “MON ANGLE ”. In this submenu, we can
get following data:

Calculated angle between phase currents on each side, access path is


“VALUES(MON VALUES(CUR&CUR PHASE ANGLE”.
Calculated angle between phase voltage on each side, access path is
“VALUES(MON VALUES( VOL&VOL PHASE ANGLE”.
Calculated angle between phase voltage and phase currents on each side, access path is
“VALUES(MON VALUES( VOL&CUR PHASE ANGLE”.
Calculated angle between adjusted phase currents on each side, access path is
“VALUES(MON VALUES( ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE”.
Calculated angle between adjusted phase currents on each side of common winding, access path
is

“VALUES(MON VALUES(ZS ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE”.


7.3.2.3 REPORT display menu

This menu is used to display operation report (OPERATION REPORT), abnormality report
(AUTOSUPERV REPORT) and change of binary status input report (BINCHANGE REPORT). The
access path is listed here respectively:

“REPORT(OPERATION REPORT”,
“REPORT(AUTOSUPERV REPORT”,
“REPORT(BINCHANGE REPORT”.

The equipment can store 32 records of each kind of these reports in non-volatile memory.

Keys ▲ and ▼ are used to select which kind of the report to be displayed by scrolling the cursor
upward or downward. Press key ENT will display the report selected. The latest report will be
displayed first. Press key + or - will display next or last report. If the report cannot be displayed
on one page, key ▲ or ▼ can be used to scroll it. Pressing key ESC will return to upper level.

7.3.2.4 Report PRINT menu

This menu is used to print settings (SETTINGS), present waveforms (PRESENT OSCILLOG),
operation report (OPERATION REPORT), abnormality report (AUTOSUPERV REPORT) or
change of binary status input reports (BINCHANGE REPORT):

− “PRINT(SETTINGS(…”,
− “PRINT(OPERATION REPORT(…”,
− “PRINT(AUTOSUPERV REPORT(…”,
− “PRINT(BINCHANGE REPORT(…”.
− “PRINT(PRESENT OSCILLOG(…”.

l Settings (SETTINGS) printing

In this submenu following items can be printed by selection:

− all of the settings(TOTAL SETTINGS),


− equipment parameters (EQUIPMENT SETTINGS),
− system parameters (SYSTEM SETTINGS),
− main protection (MAIN PROT SETTINGS),
− backup protection of various sides(SIDE 1--4 SETTINGS),

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 117


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

− common winding(COMWIND SETTINGS),


− calculated differential protection settings (CALC DIF SETTINGS),
− tripping output logic settings (TRIP MATRIX) ,
− the latest modified settings (RECENT MODIFY SET), and
− protection settings of various groups (OTHER GRP SETTINGS).

The latest modified settings printing contents include the latest modified equipment parameters,
system parameters, and the protection settings before and after modification.

Protection settings of different groups can be printed without changing the active setting group
number.

l Operation report (OPERATION REPORT) printing

Contents of the operation report comprises real time of protection pickup, relative time of
protection operation, the faulty phase, relevant protection element and binary status around
protection pickup.

The equipment can store waveform oscillograms of eight faults. In this submenu waveforms of
differential current of all phases, residual differential current, and current and voltage on all sides
can be printed.

The differential current waveform printing contents include differential current on all phases,
differential current on all sides after correction, maximal calculated amplitude of various
waveforms within 10 ms – 30 ms after pickup, second, third and fifth harmonics of differential
current of all phases, and tripping time sequence of various protective elements.

The residual differential current waveform printing contents include residual current itself, residual
current after regulation of various sides, phase current of various sides of zero differential
protection, maximal calculated amplitude of various waveforms within 10 ms – 30 ms after starting,
and tripping time sequence of various protection operations.

The current and voltage waveform printing includes current and voltage of all sides of transformer,
maximal calculated amplitude of various waveforms within 10 ms – 30 ms after pickup, and
tripping time sequence of various protective elements.

Keys ▲ and ▼ are used to select which kind of the report to be printed by scrolling the cursor
upward or downward. Press key ENT will print the report selected.

l Present waveform (PRESENT OSCILLOG) printing

This submenu includes manual triggered oscillogram record (OSILLOGGRAPHY), present binary
inputs printing (BINARY INPUT), normal phase angle printing (PHASE ANGLE), normal differential
current printing (DIF CUR OSCILLOG), normal residual differential current printing (ET REF
OSCILLOG), and normal current and voltage of certain side printing (SIDEN OSCILLOG).

In order to ensure simultaneity of normal waveforms of various items printing and normal phase
angle printing, please manual trigger oscillogram record first by select item OSILLOGGRAPHY
before printing.

Normal phase angle printing contents include current phase angle between all sides, voltage
phase angle between all sides, voltage and current phase angle between all sides, current phase
angle after differential current correction, and residual differential current phase angle of all sides.

This function together with normal differential current printing, normal residual current printing,
current and voltage of all sides printing, amplitude of various waveforms calculation, and present

118 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

binary input printing are very useful to various tests and checks during commissioning on site.

In order to make it easier to check status of protection binary inputs, the binary status change
report (BINCHANGE REPORT) will be displayed automatically when status of any protection
enabling binary input changes. The LCD will resume its original displaying after 5 s
approximately.

7.3.2.5 Parameter SETTING menu

This menu comprises 4 submenus: equipment parameters (DEVICE SETTING), system


parameters (SYSTEM SETTING), protection parameters (SETTING) and copy settings (COPY
SETTING). These parameters can be modified on relevant submenu.

Function of submenu copy settings (COPY SETTING) is to copy settings of present active group
to another setting group. It is convenient to modify settings of the group if needed.

Keys ▲ and ▼ are used to select which kind of the settings to be modified by scrolling the cursor
upward or downward. Press key ◄ or ► to move the cursor to the digit to be modified. Press key
+ and – to modify data. Press key ESC to return back without modification. Pressing key ENT the
LCD will prompt to input confirm code, Press keys +, ◄, ▲ and – in sequence, the modification
will be completed.

Tripping output logic setting can be set on front panel of the equipment. Press key ▲ or ▼and
move the cursor to the item “tripping logic setting”. Press key ◄ and move the cursor to the
beginning of left end. Press key ◄ again and the tripping output logic settings will be expanded
as 16 bits. Press ◄ or ► and move the cursor to the bit which shall be modified. Press key “+”
and “-“ to modify it. Press ENT to confirm the modification or press ESC to cancel it. Then, the
displaying will return to hexadecimal code state.

Connection group of the transformer can be set also on front panel of the equipment. Press key
▲ or ▼and move the cursor to the item “connection mode of transformer”. Press key ◄ and
move the cursor to the beginning of left end. Press key ◄ again and the connection mode code
will be expanded as detail expression. Press ◄ or ► and move the cursor to the bit which shall
be modified. Press key “+” and “-“ to modify it. Press ENT to confirm the modification or press
ESC to cancel it. Then, the displaying will return to decimal code state.

When setting group number or system parameters have been configured, the protection settings
have to be confirmed once again. Otherwise, settings of the new group will be considered
invalid.

Configuration of settings must conform to relevant specification. If one or some wrong settings
are entered, the LCD will display position of the wrong setting for 3 s and then display the first
wrong setting for the operator to modify it.

Active setting group can be changed on front panel of the equipment. Press key “GRP” , the
present setting group number and the new group number will be displayed on LCD. Press key
“+” and “-“ to modify the group number. Press ENT to confirm it and a prompt will be displayed to
enter the password. Enter the password by press keys “+”, ◄, ▲ and ”-“. Press ENT to
confirm and the new group number will become the active one. Press ESC to cancel the operation.

Please note that when the user changes system parameters of the equipment, the protection
settings under all group numbers have to be confirmed once again. Otherwise when active setting
group number is changed, “Settings Invalid” signal will be issued, and the equipment will be
blocked. The correct method of setting group change is setting the system parameters in advance.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 119


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

They are seldom modified. If they do need to be modified, method mentioned above shall be
followed. Then set protection settings under various group correctly.

Another method of confirmation of protection settings under various groups is confirming these
settings by copy setting function, and do not set system parameters again during modifying setting
process.

Please note that when copy settings method is adopted, active setting group number will be
changed to the new on automatically.

7.3.2.6 CLOCK set menu

After enter the submenu, the LCD will display current date and time.

Keys ▲, ▼, ◄ and ► are used to select the digit to be modified. Keys + and – are used to
modify it. Press key ESC to return without modification and press key ENT to confirm the
modification and return.

7.3.2.7 Program IDENTNO display menu

The LCD displays software version of CPU module and MON module as well as creating time of
the software.

7.3.2.8 Debug menu

l COMM STATUS

This submenu is used to monitor communication condition of the equipment with external system.
Display of this submenu is as follows:

Fig. 7.2.3 Display of communication status

Columns 485A and 485B display communication condition of RS-485 port1 and RS-485 port2
respectively. If communication condition is normal, “Y” will flash in the related position. If there
is flashing “N” in the position, it mean there are some problems. Please check the communication.

Item Status Meaning


data received N Circuit is open or no data is sent from external system.
frame received N Configuration of the baud rate or protocol is wrong.
message received N Configuration of the address is wrong.

send data N There is problem with the message.

120 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

“Data received” means the equipment has received data from external system. If “N” flashes
means the circuit is open or no data is sent from external system.

“Frame received” means the equipment has received complete frame from external system. If
“N” flashes means Configuration of the baud rate or protocol is wrong.

“Message received” means the equipment has received related message from external system.
If “N” flashes means Configuration of the address is wrong.

“Send data” means the equipment has sent data to external system. If “N” flashes means there
is problem with the message.

Communication condition is normal if “Y” of all items flashes.

l MEMORY DEBUG

The LCD displays real time value in memory of CPU, DSP1 and DSP2. These data are used
mainly for program debugging.

7.3.2.9 Screen DISPLAY control menu

This submenu is used to modify displaying of connection diagram of the transformer and relevant
data.

The control consists of 5 parameters:

− “Transformer Type (2W/3W/AUTO)”,


− “LVSide Branch Set(DB/SL/SR)”,
− “HVSide Connection Mode (Y/Δ)”,
− “MVSide Connection Mode (Y/Δ)”
− “LVSide Connection Mode (Y/Δ)”.

In the LCD displaying, side 1 is used as HV side 1 of the transformer; side 2 is used as MV side of
the transformer, side 3 and side 4 are displayed as two branches on LV side of the transformer.
Details about these parameters are as follows:

1) Transformer Type (2W/3W/AUTO)

0: 2W, display a two-windings transformer on LCD;


1: 3W, display a three-windings transformer on LCD;
2: AUTO, display an autotransformer on LCD;

2) LVSide Branch Set (DB/SL/SR)

0: DB, display two branches on LV side on LCD;


1: SL, display a single branch on the left LV side on LCD;
2: SR, display a single branch on the right LV side on LCD;

3) Displaying connection mode on side 1 (Y/Δ)

0: Star-connection windings on side 1;


1: Delta-connection windings on side 1.

4) Displaying connection mode on side 2 (Y/Δ)

0: Star-connection windings on side 2;


1: Delta-connection windings on side 2.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 121


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

5) Displaying connection mode on side 3 (Y/Δ)

0: Star-connection windings of two branches on side 3;


1: Delta-connection windings of two branches on side 3.

The user can select connection diagram of the transformer required through these parameters.

7.4 Use of assistant Test Software-DBG-2000

7.4.1 Function summary of DBG-2000 communication software


DBG-2000 configuration and test program (user version) is developed for the user to config, test
and maintain RCS-978E transformer protection equipment on site. It comprises four parts:
sampled value display, settings reading and modification, report process and test. These four
parts correspond to 4 files 978E3_status, 978E3 _set, 978E3_rpt and 978E3_tst respectively and
are described hereinafter. We have to say that the four configuration file is relevant with special
version of protection program. That is, when the protection program is upgrade, the above
mentioned four configuration files must upgrade at the same time, otherwise it may bring
confusion of settings to the equipment at the time of parameter setting.

Connect RS-232 communication port of the computer and that mounted on left side of front panel
of RCS-978 protection equipment by a cable with DB-9 connectors on both ends. Run the program
DBG-2000. If the connection is correct, the screen will show “RCS-978E3 connected”, see Fig.
7.4.1. Even if the computer is off line, this picture will be still shown but the words about
connection will disappear.

Fig. 7.4.1 Display of connection status of DBG2000 with RCS-978E

7.4.2 Connection of protection equipment and PC


A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s front panel for communication with personal
computer. All that is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the DBG-2000
software provided with the equipment. Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure
for 9 pin connectors.

122 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

Fig. 7.4.2 Definition of RS-232 wiring cable

7.4.3 Configuration of PC and the software before use


l PC configuration

Set the PC com port’s baud rate which is connected with front series port of RCS-978E as
9600bps.

l Software configuration

There are 3 bars on top of the screen, from top to bottom: title bar, menu bar and tool bar, see fig.
7.4.3.

Fig. 7.4.3 Title bar, menu bar and tool bar

First, click the first button of tool bar parameter, dialog box of communication parameters is
displayed, see Fig. 7.4.4. Only the parameter of [COM port] shall be configured as the port of
computer which is actually connected with the equipment, all other parameters shall be configured
as the same as displayed in Fig. 7.4.4.

Fig. 7.4.4 Dialog box of communication parameters

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 123


Chapter 7 Human-machine Interface

7.4.4 Operation instruction of the software


Please refer to appendix E for detail operation instruction of the software. The contents of
appendix E is an example of instruction for RCS-978E V3.03 program, but it is similar to other type
of RCS-978. Here is only brief description of usage.

7.4.4.1 Protection parameters setting

l Offline protection parameters setting - A convenient function of the software

The function is used for offline parameter setting. First, input setting parameters and saves it in PC,
then connects PC with the protection equipment, executive “setting transfer” command, and the
settings saved in PC will be transferred to the protection equipment, so most part of the setting
operation can be finished in office instead of in substation.

Here is the procedure to input settings offline. Before connect PC with RCS-978E, run the software
of DBG2000,click on “setting” icon, a popup dialog box will appear which asks user whether or not
to set parameter offline, click “yes” and input “978C” to confirm the relay type and version of the
protection program, then parameter setting interface will appear. The settings displayed first are
default settings, user can replace them with application-specific settings. After modification, save
the settings into a file. When PC is connected with the protection equipment, open the setting file
and transfer setting to protection.

l Online setting by DBG-2000

When PC is connecting with RCS-978E, run DBG-2000, the PC screen will display “RCS-978E
connected”, click on “SETTING” icon, then parameter setting interface will appear, the settings
uploaded from RCS-978E will be displayed, user can modify them to application-specific settings.

7.4.4.2 Status

Click button , user can observe real time sampled data and binary inputs status.

7.4.4.3 Report

Click button , entering report view part of the program, choose a report in the table, and click
“report record”, save report data according to following clue on instruction. The data can be used
in the auxiliary analyze software to show us the fault course of power system and the logic
calculation course of RCS-978E again.

7.4.4.4 SIG RESET

Click button , all magnetic latched output relays and signal relays will be reset.

7.4.4.5 Trip test

Click button , entering trip test part of the program, click contacts to change the status of
relays displayed, a same operation command to breaker circuit will be issued. This function is
used to test breaker circuit without apply electric quantities to the protection equipment.

124 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.1 Automatic Supervision

8.1.1 Relay self-monitoring and test


Though the protection system is in quiescent state under normal conditions, it is waiting for a
power system fault to occur at any time and must operate for the fault without failure. When
equipment is in energizing process before the LED HEALTHY is on, the equipment need to be
checked to ensure no errors. Therefore, the automatic supervision function, which checks the
health of the protection system during normal operation, plays an important role.

The numerical relay based on the microprocessor operations is suitable for implementing this
automatic supervision function of the protection system. The RCS-978 series implements the
automatic supervision function taking advantage of this feature based on the following concept:

− The supervision function should not affect protection performance.


− Perform supervision to the whole equipment shall be a full-scale check.
− When a failure occurs, it should be able to easily identify the location of failure.
If equipment is blocked, it means relay is out of service. Therefore must re-energize the relays or
reset CPU module and MON module to make relay into service. During automatic test just after
re-energization, the tripping outputs are blocked for 2 s.

8.1.2 Relay self-supervision


RCS-978E has CPU module and MON module need to be supervised and the two modules have
the same hardware configurations. Items listed following are the dominative ones in RCS-978E.

Relay hardware monitoring


The DSP1, DSP2, RAM, EPROM, FPGA and CPLD chips both on CPU and MON modules are
monitored to ensure whether they are damaged or have errors. If any one of them is detected
damaged or having error, equipment is blocked.

Sampled data monitoring


To confirm that the sampled data used for protection calculation are correct, in normal program,
RCS-978 compare data of CPU module with that of MON module per cycle and block equipment
when errors are found.

Fault detector element monitoring


When fault detector in MON module picks up, while the fault detector in CPU module doesn’t pick
up, or fault detector in CPU and MON module picks up continuously, equipment will response
according to program.

Check binary input of CPU and MON


Binary inputs of detected by CPU and MON modules should be the same. Otherwise, equipment
is blocked.

Check setting
RCS-978E has sixteen setting groups. The settings of active setting group are checked to ensure
they are reasonable. If the settings are checked to be invalid, equipment is blocked.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 125


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

Communication monitoring
Equipment has three software modules, which are on CPU module, MON module and HMI module
respectively. There are two communication ways among them, communication between CPU
module and MON module and communication between CPU module and HMI module, which are
monitored to ensure data exchange is in normal condition. If communication fails, equipment will
send alarming signal without being blocked.

8.1.3 Secondary circuit monitoring


Opto-coupler power monitoring
Positive power supply of opto-coupler is monitored.

CT /VT circuit failure detection


CT circuit and VT circuit are both monitored.

DC supply monitoring
DC supply is monitored.

Tripping output circuit monitoring


Tripping output relay driving transistor is always monitored in normal program, blocking message
will be issued when the equipment finds abnormality of the tripping output circuit.

8.1.4 Failure alarms information


When a failure is detected by the automatic supervision, it is followed with an LCD message, LED
indication, external alarm and event recording. The following table shows the details.

Abnormality information printed or displayed on LCD and trouble shooting are described in
following table.

Mark “*” in the table means all protective functions will be blocked and “#” means only alarm signal
is issued.

126 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Table 8.1.1 Abnormality information

LED LED
Information(LCD) Description Suggestion Blocking
“HEALTHY” “ALARM”
1 CPU RAM Failure CPU module RAM damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
2 CPU EPROM Error CPU module flash memory damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Inform factory for maintenance.
3 CPU Setting Error CPU module EEPROM damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
4 CPU DSP Error CPU module DSP damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Protection setting has not been modified
5 Settings Invalid after modification of rated secondary Modify protection setting again. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
current.
6 Modify settings In the course of modifying settings No additional actions OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Check if its power circuit is
7 Opt-coupler Power Loss Power supply of opto-coupler lost. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
connected correctly.
8 BinaryOutputModule Alarm Output transistor damaged. Inform factory for maintenance. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Check connection between
CPU module can not communicate with modules CPU and MON. Check
9 Inner Comm. Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked

Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records


MON module. software version of MON. Notice
factory for treatment if needed.
10 MON RAM Failure MON module RAM damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
11 MON EPROM Error MON module flash memory damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Inform factory for maintenance.
12 MON Setting Error MON module EEPROM damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
13 MON DSP Error MON module DSP damaged. OFF ON Equipment is blocked
Disagreement between pickup of
14 Inconsistent Pickup corresponding fault detectors in modules Inform factory for maintenance. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
CPU and MON.
Pickup of fault detectors in CPU module
15 CPU Defective Pickup ON ON Equipment is not blocked
lasts for more than 10 s. Check secondary circuit and
Pickup of fault detectors in MON module settings.
16 MON Defective Pickup ON ON Equipment is not blocked
lasts for more than 10 s.
ComWind CT Superv. CT circuit or sampling circuit of common Check sampled values and related
17 ON ON Equipment is not blocked
Alarm winding is abnormal. circuit. Find out the failure is due
CT circuit or sampling circuit of side4 is to secondary circuits or hardware.
18 Side 4 CT Superv.Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal. Check sampled values and related
CT circuit or sampling circuit of side3 is circuit. Find out the failure is due
19 Side 3 CT Superv.Alarm
to secondary circuits or hardware.
ON ON Equipment is not blocked
127

abnormal.
Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records
128

CT circuit or sampling circuit of side2 is


20 Side 2 CT Superv.Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal
CT circuit or sampling circuit of side1 is
21 Side 1 CT Superv.Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal.
VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 4 is
22 Side 4 VT Superv. Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal.
VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 3 is
23 Side 3 VT Superv. Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal.
VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 2 is
24 Side 2 VT Superv. Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal.
VT circuit or sampling circuit of side 1 is
25 Side 1 VT Superv. Alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
abnormal.
Differential current of residual differential
26 REF Superv.Alarm relay/ common-and-serial-windings Check related secondary circuit.. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
differential relay is abnormal.
CT circuit of differential circuit or residual
27 Diff. Superv. Alarm differential circuit fails. Position of failure Check related secondary circuit. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
has not been found.
Check secondary circuit and
28 SIDE4 ROV ALARM Residual voltage circuit is abnormal ON ON Equipment is not blocked
settings.
Check secondary circuit and
29 SIDE3 ROV ALARM Residual voltage circuit is abnormal ON ON Equipment is not blocked
settings.
30 ComWind CT Supervision CT circuit of common winding fails. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
31 Side 4 CT Supervision CT circuit of side 4 fails. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
32 Side 3 CT Supervision CT circuit of side 3 fails. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
Check related circuit. Reset the
33 Side 2 CT Supervision CT circuit of side 2 fails.
equipment when the circuits are
ON ON Equipment is not blocked
34 Side 1 CT Supervision CT circuit of side 1 fails. normal. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
CT circuit of differential circuit or residual
35 CT Supervision differential circuit fails. Position of fault has ON ON Equipment is not blocked
not been found.
36 Side2 OL Blk TapSwitch Overload on side 2 blocking OLTC picks up Check settings. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
37 Side1 OL Blk TapSwitch Overload on side 1 blocking OLTC picks up Check settings. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
38 Side 4 OverLoad Overload protection on side4 picks up. Treat it according to requirement ON ON Equipment is not blocked
39 Side 3 OverLoad Overload protection on side3 picks up. of the system operation. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
40 Side 2 OverLoad T2 Overload alarm stage2 on side2 picks up. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
41 Side 2 OverLoad T1 Overload alarm stage1 on side2 picks up. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
42 Side 1 OverLoad T2 Overload alarm stage2 on side1 picks up. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
43 Side 1 OverLoad T1 Overload alarm stage1 on side1 picks up. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
44 Side 2 Cooler Startup T2 Cooling initiation of stage2 on side 2 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
45 Side 2 Cooler Startup T1 Cooling initiation of stage1 on side 2 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
46 Side 1 Cooler Startup T2 Cooling initiation of stage2 on side 1 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
47 Side 1 Cooler Startup T1 Cooling initiation of stage1 on side 1 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
48 ComSide Cooler Startup Cooling initiation of common winding picks up ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
49 ComWind OverLoad Common winding overload alarm picks up ON ON Equipment is not blocked
50 LVside OverLoad Overload alarm on LV side picks up. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
51 Side1 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 1 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
52 Side2 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 2 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
53 Side3 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 3 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
54 Side4 CompVolt. Pickup Composite voltage element on side 4 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
Side2 InvTime ROC Inverse time residual overcurrent on side 2
55 ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
Pickup picks up.
56 Side2 InvTime OC Pickup Inverse time overcurrent on side 2 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
Side1 InvTime ROC Inverse time residual overcurrent on side 1

Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records


57 ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
Pickup picks up.
58 Side1 InvTime OC Pickup Inverse time overcurrent on side 1 picks up. ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
ComSide 1nv ROC Inverse time residual overcurrent of
59 ON OFF Equipment is not blocked
Pickup common wingding picks up.
60 ComWind ROC Alarm Residual current of common winding alarm ON ON Equipment is not blocked
61 CPU Drive Test Alarm Test for tripping in CPU module begins. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
Check setting
62 MON Drive Test alarm Test for tripping in MON module begins. ON ON Equipment is not blocked
129
Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.2 Metering

RCS-978E performs continuous measurement of the analogue input quantities. The measurement
data shown below is displayed on the LCD mounted in the front panel of the equipment or on the
local or remote PC.

Equipment samples 24 points per cycle. Calculate the effective value in each interval and LCD will
be updated every 0.5 second. The following system quantities are displayed in effective values on
the secondary side of the CT and VT which can be observed by entering the command menu.
Access path is provided later.

8.2.1 Voltage and current on each side


l Sampled value of current and voltage on side 1

Fig. 8.2.1 Sampled value of current and voltage on side 1


In the figure:

PIN Volt.: phase voltage A, B, C;


ZS Volt.: calculated zero sequence voltage ;
Extern ZS Volt.: external zero sequence voltage ;
NS Volt.: negative sequence voltage;
PN Curr.: phase current A,B,C on side1;
ZS Curr.: calculated residual current on side 1;
Neu ZS Curr.: external residual current on side 1;
Gap ZS Curr.: Gap residual current on side 1.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE1 MEASURE”.

130 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

l Sampled value of current and voltage on side 2

Fig. 8.2.2 Sampled value of current and voltage on side 2

In the figure:

PN Volt.: phase voltage A,B,C;


ZS Volt.: calculated zero sequence voltage ;
Extern ZS Volt.: external zero sequence voltage ;
NS Volt.: negative sequence voltage;
PN Curr.: phase current A,B,C on side 2;
ZS Curr.: calculated residual current on side 2;
Neu ZS Curr.: external residual current on side 2.
Gap ZS Curr.: Gap residual current on side 2.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE2 MEASURE”.

l Sampled value of current and voltage on side 3,

Fig. 8.2.3 Sampled value of current and voltage on side 3


In the figure:

PN Volt.: phase voltage A,B,C on side 3;


NS Volt.: negative sequence voltage on side 3;
External ZS Volt.: external zero sequence voltage on side 3;
PN Curr.: phase current A,B,C on side 3;

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE3 MEASURE”.

l Sampled value of current and voltage on side 4,

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 131


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

Fig. 8.2.4 Sampled value of current and voltage on side 4

In the figure:

PN Volt.: phase voltage of phase A,B,C on side 4;


NS Volt.: negative sequence voltage on side 4;
External ZS Volt.: external zero sequence voltage on side 4;
PN Curr.: phase current A,B,C on side 4.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàSIDE4 MEASURE”.

l Sampled value of current and voltage of common winding,

Fig. 8.2.5 Sampled value of current and voltage of common winding

In the figure:

PN Curr.: phase current A,B,C;


ZS Curr.: calculated residual current;
Neu ZS Curr.: external residual current.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàCOMWIND MEASURE”.

132 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.2.2 Corrected voltage and current on each side


l Corrected current of differential protection,

Fig. 8.2.6 Corrected current of differential protection

In the figure:

S1 PN Curr.: corrected phase current on side 1 phase A,B,C;


S2 PN Curr.: corrected phase current on side 2 phase A,B,C;
S3 PN Curr.: corrected phase current on side 3 phase A,B,C;
S4 PN Curr.: corrected phase current on side 4 phase A,B,C.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàDIF ADJUST MEASURE”.

l Corrected residual current of residual differential protection,

Fig. 8.2.7 Corrected residual current of residual differential protection

In the figure:

Side1: calculated residual current on side 1;


Side1: calculated residual current on side 2;
ComWind: calculated residual current or common winding.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàZSDIF ADJUST MEASURE”.

l Calculated value of overexcitation protection,

Fig. 8.2.8 Calculated value of overexcitation

In the figure:

OverExci. Ratio: times of overexcitation of transformer;

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 133


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

Frequency: frequency of power system 。

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREàOVEREXICI MEASURE”.

l Calculated differential current,

Fig. 8.2.9 Calculated differential current

In the figure:

Diff. Curr.: phase differential current;


REF Curr.: residual differential current;
Diff. Thresh.: restraint f differential protection;
REF Threshold: restraint of residual differential protection;
2nd HarmRatio: 2nd harmonics content in differential current;
3rd HarmRatio: 3rd harmonics content in differential current;
5th HarmRatio: 5th harmonics content in differential current.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESàMON MEASUREà MON DIFCUR” and “VALUESà


CPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREà CPU DIFCUR”.

134 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

l Calculated correction coefficient of differential protection

Fig. 8.2.10 Calculated correction coefficient of differential protection

In the figure:

Diff. Side1 Coef.: correction coefficient on side 1;


Diff. Side2 Coef.: correction coefficient on side 2;
Diff. Side3 Coef.: correction coefficient on side 3;
Diff. Side4 Coef.: correction coefficient on side 4;
Side1 Sec.Rated Curr: secondary rated current on side 1;
Side2 Sec.Rated Curr: secondary rated current on side 2;
Side3 Sec.Rated Curr: secondary rated current on side 3;
Side4 Sec.Rated Curr: secondary rated current on side 4;
REF Side1 Coef.: correction coefficient on side1 for REF;
REF Side2 Coef.: correction coefficient on side2 for REF;
REF ComWind Coef.: correction coefficient of common winding for REF.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU MEASUREà CPU CALCSET”.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 135


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.2.3 Calculated angle of voltages and currents on each side


The values displayed are degrees in unit.

l Calculated angle between phase currents on each side,

Fig. 8.2.11 Calculated angle between phase current on each side

In the figure:

Side1A-B: angle between phase A and B currents on side 1;


Side1A-C: angle between phase A and C currents on side 1;
Side2A-B: angle between phase A and B currents on side 2;
Side2A-C: angle between phase A and C currents on side 2;
Side3A-B: angle between phase A and B currents on side 3;
Side3A-C: angle between phase A and C currents on side 3;
Side4A-B: angle between phase A and B currents on side 4;
Side4A-C: angle between phase A and C currents on side 4;
CW A-B: angle between phase A and B currents of common winding;
CW A-C: angle between phase A and C currents of common winding.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESàCUR&CUR PHASE ANGLE”.

l Calculated angle between phase voltages on each side

Fig. 8.2.12 Calculated angle between phase voltage on each side

In the figure:

Side1 A-B: angle between phase A and B voltages on side 1;


Side1A-C: angle between phase A and C voltages on side 1;
Side2A-B: angle between phase A and B voltages on side 2;
Side2A-C: angle between phase A and C voltages on side 2;
Side3 A-B: angle between phase A and B voltages on side 3;
Side3 A-C: angle between phase A and C voltages on side 3;
Side4 A-B: angle between phase A and B voltages on side 4;
Side4 A-C: angle between phase A and C voltages on side 4.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESà VOL&VOL PHASE ANGLE”.

136 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

l Calculated angle between phase voltage and phase currents on each side

Fig. 8.2.13 Calculated angle between phase voltage and phase currents on each side

In the figure:

Side1: angles between phase voltages and phase currents on side 1. The values
are angles of UA and IA, UB and IB, UC and IC,
Side2: angles between phase voltages and phase currents on side 2. The values
are similar to side 1.
Side3: angles between phase voltages and phase currents on side 3. The values
are similar to side 1.
Side4: angles between phase voltages and phase currents on side 3. The values
are similar to side 1.
S1 ZS Curr.: angle between calculated residual voltage on side1 and calculated residual
current on side 1.
Ext ZS: angle between calculated residual voltage on side1 and external residual
current on side 1.
S1 ZS Curr.: angle between calculated residual voltage on side2 and calculated residual
current on side 2.
Ext ZS: angle between calculated residual voltage on side2 and external residual
current on side 2.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESà VOL&CUR PHASE ANGLE”.

l Calculated angle between adjusted phase currents on each side

Fig. 8.2.14 Calculated angle between adjusted phase currents on each side

In the figure:

Side1- Side2: angles between same phase currents on side 1 and side 2.
Side1- Side3: angles between same phase currents on side 1 and side 3.
Side1- Side4: angles between same phase currents on side 1 and side 4.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESà ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE”.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 137


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

l Calculated angle between corrected phase currents on each side of common winding

Fig. 8.2.15 Calculated angle between adjusted currents on each side

In the figure:

REF S1-S2: angle between residual currents on side1 and side 2.


REF S1-CW: angle between residual currents on side1 and common winding.
A S1-S2: angle between phase A currents on side1 and side 2.
A S1-CW: angle between phase A current on side1 and common winding.
B S1-S2: angle between phase B currents on side1 and side 2.
B S1-CW: angle between phase B currents on side1 and common winding.
C S1-S2: angle between phase C current on side1 and side 2.
C S1-CW: angle between phase C current on side1 and common winding.

Access path is “VALUESàMON VALUESà ZSDIF ADJCUR PHASE ANGLE”.

8.2.4 Binary inputs


l Binary inputs for enabling function

Diff. Prot. ContactInput: 0


REF Prot. ContactInput: 0
Backup ContactInput
5: 0
Side1 OC Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side1 ROC Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side1 Gap Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side2 OC Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side2 ROC Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side2 Gap Prot. ContactInput: 0
Side3 OC ContactInput: 0
Side4 OC ContactInput: 0

ComWind BakProt. ContactInput: 0


Side4 VT Out of Service
: 0
Side3 VT Out of Service
: 0
Side2 VT Out of Service
: 0
Side1 VT Out of Service
: 0

Backup ContactInput
4: 0
Backup ContactInput
3: 0

Backup ContactInput
2: 0

Fig. 8.2.16 Binary inputs for enabling function

138 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

In the figure:

Diff. Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables differential protection


REF Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables residual differential protection
Backup ContactInput5: backup binary input 5.
Side1 OC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables overcurrent protection on side 1
Side1 ROC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables residual overcurrent protection
on side 1
Side1 Gap Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables Gap protection on side 1
Side2 OC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables overcurrent protection on side 2
Side2 ROC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables residual overcurrent protection
on side 2
Side2 Gap Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables Gap protection on side 2
Side3 OC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables overcurrent protection on side 3
Side4 OC Prot. ContactInput: binary input which enables overcurrent protection on side 4
ComWind BakProt. ContactInput: binary input which enables backup protection of common
winding
Side4 VT Out of Service: binary input which indicates VT on side 4 out of service
Side3 VT Out of Service: binary input which indicates VT on side 3 out of service
Side2 VT Out of Service: binary input which indicates VT on side 2 out of service
Side1 VT Out of Service: binary input which indicates VT on side 1 out of service
Backup ContactInput4: backup binary input 4.
Backup ContactInput3: backup binary input 3.
Backup ContactInput2: backup binary input 2.

Access path is “VALUESàCPU VALUESàCPU STATUSàCONTACT INPUT”.

l Other binary inputs

Fig. 8.2.17 Other binary inputs

In the figure:

Monitor Comm. Blk: binary input which prohibit the equipment sends protection messages
to remote PC or substation automation system.
Print BinaryInput: print starting button input.
TimePulse Signal: GPS binary input for time adjustment.
Side1 BreakerOff: auxiliary contact of physical off-position 52b of breaker on side 1.
Side2 BreakerOff: auxiliary contact of physical off-position 52b of breaker on side 2.

Access path is “Valuesà CPU Valuesà CPU STATUSàOTHER INPUT”.

8.3 Event Records and Sequence Events Record

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 139


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.3.1 Summary of application


When using a substation automation system, time-tagged events can be continuously sent or
polled from the relay. The time-tagging of the events that are emerging from binary input signals
have a resolution of 1 ms.
Event record and SER (sequence events record) feature simplify post-fault analysis and improve
understanding of simple and complex protective scheme operations. They also aid in test and
troubleshooting of relay settings and protection schemes.
The RCS-978 series provides the following recording functions:
− Event recording;
− Fault recording;
− Normal recording.
These records are displayed on the LCD of the relay front panel or on the local or remote PC.

8.3.2 Event records


The equipment can store 32 alarm event records and 32 binary input changing report, which is
named as abnormality report (SELF CHECK REPORT) or change of binary input reports (BIN-
CHANGE REPORT). The counters of both reports cycles from 0 to 255 and the contents
involves following items:
l Abnormality report information
All failure alarms of automatic supervision listed in Table 8.1.1 will be logged in event recording.
l Change of binary status input reports
If the state of one or more binary inputs has changed, the new status is logged as an event.
Navigate the menu to view the report in LCD or print the report.

8.3.3 Fault recording


Fault record consists of operation recording and fault waveform recording. Fault recording is
triggered by operation of a fault detector element of RCS-978E. The counter of the report is from 0
to 254.
Here fault recording have two types: fault detector picks up with or without protection tripping
8.3.3.1 Fault operation report record
The equipment can store 32 operation records in non-volatile memory. If a new fault occurs when
32 faults have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one.
The following items are recorded for one fault:
l Date and time of fault occurrence
The time resolution is 1 ms using the relay internal clock. Initiating date and time is the time when
a fault detector picks up. Relative time is the time protection element operate s to trip after that.
l Faulty phase
The faulty phase identified by the relay is showed in the record report.
l Tripping mode
This item shows the protection scheme that issued the tripping command. If no protective element

140 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

operates to trip but only equipment fault detector picks up, fault report will record the title of fault
detector.
l Tripping channel
The tripped circuit breaker are also showed.
8.3.3.2 Fault waveform record capacity and information
The equipment can save 8 pieces of fault waveform oscillogram. If a new fault occurs when 8 fault
waveform records have been stored, the oldest will be overwritten by the latest one. The
equipment stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 24 samples per cycle.
The recording time before fault detector pickup is fixed for 2cycles (40 ms at 50Hz). The recording
time after fault detector pickup is fixed for 6cycles (120 ms at 50Hz) without protection operation. If
there is anyone protection element operates, then the recording time will be prolonged to another
8 cycles (160ms at 50Hz) in order to show continuous 8- cycle waveform after the protection
element operates.
Each fault record consists of oscillograms of following items.
− Differential current waveforms - overall circuit differential current waveform;
− Corrected currents on each side;
− Tripping command;
− Status of binary input.
All binary inputs include disconnectors’ position status, failure binary inputs, protection binary
inputs and other binary inputs are recorded twice. Once at the time when fault detector picks up
and the other after fault detector picks up.
Fault records can be viewed through LCD or by printing. Fault waveform records can be viewed
by printing or through DBG2000 software and waveform software, see the detailed steps in 7.3.

8.3.4 Normal recording


8.3.4.1 General description

Normal recording is used to view normal operating waveform oscillograms of equipment, which
can only be triggered by manual operation on front panel keypad.
8.3.4.2 Normal recording capacity and information
Equipment can store only 1 piece recoding waveform. If you want to record a new normal
operating waveform, the old one will be overwritten by the new one. The equipment stores actual
samples that are taken at a rate of 24 samples per cycle.
Normal record consists of oscillograms of following items.
− Differential current waveforms - overall circuit differential current waveform and two partial
differential currents waveform;
− Voltage waveforms on each side;
− Current waveforms on each side.
8.3.4.3 View normal recording

Normal recording waveform can be viewed by printing. Please refer to 7.2.1.5 for detail operation
method.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 141


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

8.4 Example of Printed Fault Report

Here is an example of printed fault report.

to be continued

142 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

continued

to be continued

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 143


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

continued

to be continued

144 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

continued

8.4.1 Explanation of the printed fault report


The above displayed is a real test trip operation report. It include so much information as the
absolute and relative pickup time of the equipment, tripped phase, tripping element, differential
current of each phase, calculated 2nd and 3rd harmonics in the differential current, real time
messages of each AC input channel since pickup, and the most important part is real time
oscillogram of differential current stored in the equipment. Of course, the real time oscillogram of
current of each side also can be printed through HMI.

8.4.2 Information got from report analysis


A real fault report can provide plenty of information for analysis, for example, where the fault
location is, the quantity of fault current, tripping time, tripping element etc. A fault report is very
important for user to judge the correctness of the equipment’s operation.

Report is very important for user to judge the correctness of the equipment’s operation.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 145


Chapter 8 Self-monitoring, Metering and Records

146 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Communication

Chapter 9 Communication

9.1 Communication with Substation Automation System

The remote communication can be used for different purposes to enable better access to the
information stored in the relay. Normally, substation automation system (SPA) is used in the
case.

9.1.1 Communication port

The equipment supports two communication media.

l RS-485 serial port

RS-485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit
and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s),
continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer, SCADA system or substation
automation system is possible.

To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct
polarity must also be observed.

Both ends of the RS-485 circuit should also be terminated with matching impedance.

Fig. 9.1.1 Connection by using RS-485 ports

l Optical port

The fiber optic communication ports allows for fast and efficient communications between relays.

9.1.2 Description of message in IEC 60870-5-103 protocol


Messages sent to substation automation system are grouped according to IEC60870-5-103
protocol. Operation elements are sent by ASDU2 (time-tagged message with relative), and
status of BinaryInput and SelfSupervision are sent by ASUD1 (time-tagged message).

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 147


Chapter 9 Communication

l Operation elements
FUN INF Content FUN INF Content
195 61 Inst. Diff. Prot. 195 125 Side4 OC Prot. T1
195 62 Percent Diff. Prot. 195 126 Side4 OC Prot. T2
195 69 Side1 Phase A 195 127 Side4 OC Prot. T3
195 70 Side1 Phase B 195 128 Side4 OC Prot. T4
195 71 Side1 Phase C 195 129 Side4 OC Prot. T5
195 87 Inst. ResEarthFault Prot 195 130 Trip Side1 Breaker
195 88 Side1 OC Prot. T11 195 131 Trip Side2 Breaker
195 89 Side1 OC Prot. T12 195 132 Trip Side3 Breaker
195 90 Side1 OC Prot. T21 195 133 Trip Side4 Breaker
195 91 Side1 OC Prot. T22 195 134 Trip Side1 BC
195 92 Side1 OC Prot. T31 195 135 Trip Side2 BC
195 93 Side1 OC Prot. T32 195 136 Trip LVSide BS
195 94 Side1 ROC Prot. T11 195 137 Side2 Phase A
195 95 Side1 ROC Prot. T12 195 138 Side2 Phase B
195 96 Side1 ROC Prot. T21 195 139 Side2 Phase C
197 96 Trip Backup Breaker1 195 140 Side3 Phase A
195 97 Side1 ROC Prot. T22 195 141 Side3 Phase B
197 97 Trip Backup Breaker2 195 142 Side3 Phase C
195 98 Side1 ROC Prot. T31 195 143 Side4 Phase A
195 99 Side1 ROC Prot. T32 195 144 Side4 Phase B
195 100 Side1 Gap OVOC Prot. T1 195 145 Side4 Phase C
195 101 Side1 Gap OVOC Prot. T2 195 146 Diff. Phase A
195 102 ComWind ROC Prot. 195 147 Diff. Phase B
195 103 ComWind OC Prot. 195 148 Diff. Phase C
195 104 Side2 OC Prot. T11 197 149 Trip Backup Breaker3
195 105 Side2 OC Prot. T12 197 150 Trip Backup Breaker4
195 106 Percentage ResEarthFault Prot 197 158 Trip Backup Breaker5
195 107 DPFC Diff. Prot. 197 163 ComWind InvTime ROC Prot
195 108 Side2 OC Prot. T21 203 181 Side2 InvTime ROC Prot.
195 109 Side2 OC Prot. T22 203 182 Side2 InvTime OC Prot.
195 110 Side2 OC Prot. T31 203 183 Side1 InvTime ROC Prot.
195 111 Side2 OC Prot. T32 203 184 Side1 InvTime OC Prot.
195 112 Side2 ROC Prot. T11 195 186 Side3 ROV Prot.
195 113 Side2 ROC Prot. T12 195 187 Side4 ROV Prot.
195 114 Side2 ROC Prot. T21 195 220 Side1 Gap OC Prot. T1
195 115 Side2 ROC Prot. T22 195 221 Side1 Gap OC Prot. T2
195 116 Side2 ROC Prot. T31 195 224 Side1 ROV Prot. T1
195 117 Side2 ROC Prot. T32 195 225 Side1 ROV Prot. T2
195 118 Side2 Gap OVOC Prot. T1 195 226 Side2 Gap OC Prot. T1
195 119 Side2 Gap OVOC Prot. T2 195 227 Side2 Gap OC Prot. T2
195 120 Side3 OC Prot. T1 195 228 Side2 ROV Prot. T1
195 121 Side3 OC Prot. T2 195 229 Side2 ROV Prot. T2
195 122 Side3 OC Prot. T3 195 230 Side1 ROC Prot. T23
195 123 Side3 OC Prot. T4 195 231 Side2 ROC Prot. T23
195 124 Side3 OC Prot. T5

148 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Communication

l Self supervision
FUN INF Content FUN INF Content
195 17 ComWind CT Superv. Alarm 195 45 Side2 Cooling Initiation T2
195 18 Side4 CT Superv. Alarm 195 46 Side2 OL Blk OLTC
195 19 Side3 CT Superv. Alarm 195 48 Side3 OverLoad
195 21 Side2 CT Superv. Alarm 195 50 Side3 ROV Alarm
195 22 Side1 CT Superv. Alarm 195 51 Side4 OverLoad
195 23 Diff. Superv. Alarm 195 53 Side4 ROV Alarm
195 24 REF Superv. Alarm 195 54 ComWind Cooling Initiation
195 27 Side1 VT Superv. Alarm 195 55 ComWind ROC Alarm
195 28 Side2 VT Superv. Alarm 195 56 ComWind OverLoad
195 29 Side3 VT Superv. Alarm 195 69 Side1 CompVolt. Pickup
195 30 Side4 VT Superv. Alarm 195 70 Side2 CompVolt. Pickup
195 31 ComWind CT Supervision 195 71 Side3 CompVolt. Pickup
195 32 Side4 CT Supervision 195 72 Side4 CompVolt. Pickup
195 33 Side3 CT Supervision 195 81 Modify Settings
195 34 Side2 CT Supervision 195 82 DSP Error
197 35 Side1 CT Supervision 195 160 LVSide OverLoad
195 36 Side1 OverLoad T1 195 194 RAM Failure
197 37 Side1 OverLoad T2 195 195 EPROM Error
195 38 Side1 Cooling Initiation T1 195 196 Setting Error
195 39 Side1 Cooling Initiation T2 195 200 BinaryOutputModule Alarm
195 40 Side1 OL Blk OLTC 195 202 Opt-coupler Power Loss
195 41 CT Supervision 195 211 Inner Comm. Alarm
195 42 Side2 OverLoad T1 195 214 Defective Pickup
195 43 Side2 OverLoad T2 195 215 Inconsistent Pickup
195 44 Side2 Cooling Initiation T1
l BinaryInput
FUN INF Content FUN INF Content
195 57 Diff. Prot. Contact 195 73 Side4 VT Out of Service
195 58 REF Prot. Contact 195 74 Side3 VT Out of Service
195 59 Side1 OC Prot. Contact 195 75 Side2 VT Out of Service
195 60 Side1 ROC Prot. Contact 195 76 Side1 VT Out of Service
195 63 Side1 Gap Prot. Contact 195 77 Mon DPFC Prot. Pickup
195 64 Side2 OC Prot. Contact 195 78 Mon REF Prot. Pickup
195 65 Side2 ROC Prot. Contact 195 79 Mon Test Trip Pickup
195 66 Side2 Gap Prot. Contact 195 80 Mon Side1 BakProt Pickup
195 67 Side3 OC Prot. Contact 195 83 Mon Side2 BakProt Pickup
195 68 Side4 OC Prot. Contact 195 84 Mon Side3 BakProt Pickup
195 68 Mon ComWind Prot. Pickup 195 85 Mon Side4 BakProt Pickup
195 72 ComWind BakProt. Contact 195 213 Mon Diff. Prot. Pickup

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 149


Chapter 9 Communication

l Disturbance ACC
ACC Content ACC Content
64 Diff Curr Phase A 96 Side2 Gap ZS Curr
65 Diff Curr Phase B 97 Side2 Volt Phase A
66 Diff Curr Phase C 98 Side2 Volt Phase B
67 Diff Side1 Curr Phase A 99 Side2 Volt Phase C
68 Diff Side1 Curr Phase B 100 Side2 ZS Volt
69 Diff Side1 Curr Phase C 101 Side2 Extern ZS Volt
70 Diff Side2 Curr Phase A 102 Side2 NS Volt
71 Diff Side2 Curr Phase B 103 Side3 Curr Phase A
72 Diff Side2 Curr Phase C 104 Side3 Curr Phase B
73 Diff Side3 Curr Phase A 105 Side3 Curr Phase C
74 Diff Side3 Curr Phase B 106 Side3 Volt Phase A
75 Diff Side3 Curr Phase C 107 Side3 Volt Phase B
76 Diff Side4 Curr Phase A 108 Side3 Volt Phase C
77 Diff Side4 Curr Phase B 109 Side3 NS Volt
78 Diff Side4 Curr Phase C 110 Side3 Extern ZS Volt
79 Side1 Curr Phase A 111 Side4 Curr Phase A
80 Side1 Curr Phase B 112 Side4 Curr Phase B
81 Side1 Curr Phase C 113 Side4 Curr Phase C
82 Side1 ZS Curr 114 Side4 Volt Phase A
83 Side1 Extern ZS Curr 115 Side4 Volt Phase B
84 Side1 Gap ZS Curr 116 Side4 Volt Phase C
85 Side1 Volt Phase A 117 Side4 NS Volt
86 Side1 Volt Phase B 118 Side4 Extern ZS Volt
87 Side1 Volt Phase C 119 REF Curr
88 Side1 ZS Volt 120 REF Side1 Curr
89 Side1 Extern ZS Volt 121 REF Side2 Curr
90 Side1 NS Volt 122 REF ComWind Curr
91 Side2 Curr Phase A 123 ComWind Curr Phase A
92 Side2 Curr Phase B 124 ComWind Curr Phase B
93 Side2 Curr Phase C 125 ComWind Curr Phase C
94 Side2 ZS Curr 126 ComWind ZS Curr
95 Side2 Extern ZS Curr 127 Neutral ZS Curr
l Generic service
Group Group head Group Group head
1 Equipment Settings 7 Side2 BakProt Settings2
2 System Settings 8 Side3 BakProt Settings
3 MainProt Settings 9 Side4 BakProt Settings
4 Side1 BakProt Settings1 10 ComSide BakProt Settings
5 Side1 BakProt Settings2 25 Active Group
6 Side2 BakProt Settings1 26 Equipment Measure

150 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 9 Communication

9.2 Communication with Printer

When communicating locally with a PC using the rear series port, a special connection line is
necessary which is provided by manufacture of the equipment.

There are two parameters need to be set in RCS-978E for communication with printer, [Printer
Baud Rate] and [Automatic Print Option], the former decides the communication speed and the
later decides the printer’s activating way. Please refer to chapter 6 for details.

9.3 Communication with Local Computer

When communicating locally with printer in the station using the front series port, hardwares
needed are:

− a cable with two DB-9 male connectors at both ends;


− a personal computer.
There are no parameters needed to be set in RCS-978E for local communication with PC.

9.4 Communication with External Time Synchronization Source

The clock function (calendar clock) is used for time-tagging for the following purposes:

− event records;
− disturbance records;
− fault records;
− metering;
− automatic supervision;
− display of the system quantities in LCD;
− display of the fault records in LCD;
− display of the automatic monitoring results in LCD.
When the relay is connected with the GPS clock, all the relay clocks are synchronized with the
external time standard. There are two ways to adjust the relay clock:

− time synchronization via RS-485 serial port;


− time synchronization via binary input.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 151


Chapter 9 Communication

152 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.1 Installation

10.1.1 Mechanical installation


The RCS-978 transformer protection relay is suitable for 19" rack mounting. The necessary
mounting kits will be provided, including screws and assembly instructions.

10.1.1.1 Modules installation

As mentioned former, the RCS-978 transformer protection equipment is composed of 9 modules.


Generally, the modules are in installed position when they are delivered to the right site with the
equipment. But, when one of them cannot work normally because of any reasons, we should
replace it with a same module in good condition. Here is the sequence of each module from
bottom to top in the equipment: 1 -- AC1 module, 2 — AC2 module, 3 — MON module, 4 -- CPU
module, 5 — DC module, 6 -- SIG2 module, 7 -- SIG1 module, 8 — OUT module. Besides, HMI
module is fixed in front panel of the equipment。

Components mounted on the front panel include a 240×128 dot matrix LCD, 9 buttons and 3 LED
indicators of operation, alarm and tripping. A CPU for human-machine-interface (HMI) is also
mounted on it.

Cautions for installation:


1) Do not take out any modules outside the relay case since electronic components on the
modules are very sensitive to electrostatic discharge. If it is absolutely essential to take the
modules out of the case, do not touch the electronic components and terminals with your
bare hands.
2) Always put the module in a conductive anti-static bag when storing it.
3) Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the
equipment by touching the case.
4) Handle the module by its front panel, frame or edges of the printed circuit board.
5) Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
6) Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both at the same
electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
7) Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is at the same
potential as yourself.
8) Do not place modules in polystyrene trays.

10.2.1.2 19" rack installation

RCS-978E is made of a single layer 8U height 19” chassis with 15 connectors on its rear panel.
Fig. 10.2.1 shows dimensions of RCS-978E for reference in mounting.

10.2.2 Electrical installation and wiring


Fig. 10.2.2.1 shows external wiring of VT circuits.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 153


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

285

RCS-978
TRANSFORMER PROTECTION

运行
报警
跳闸

NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD.


8-¢6.8

Fig. 10.2.1 Dimensions of RCS-978 equipment

TV1 RCS-9 78C AC module


UAH
A 1 2 7B2 A
UBH
3 1 ZK K1 4 7B4 B
UCH S1
B 5 6 7B6 C
UNH
7B8 N
C 3U 0N
7B13
3U0 3U0
N 7B11

TV2
UAM

AC voltage Circuit
A 1 2 7B10 A
UBM
RCS-978C

3 1 ZK K2 4 7B12 B
UCM S2
B
5 6 7B14 C
UNM
7B16 N
C 3U 0N
7B17
3U0 3U0
N 7B15

TV3
U AL
A 1 2 7B18 A
U BL
3 1 Z KK 3 4 7B20 B
B
U CL
5 6 7B22 C
U NL S3
7B24 N
C 3 U0N
7B21
3 U0 3U0
N 7B19

TV 3
UAL
A 1 2 7B27 A
UBL
3 1 ZK K 3 4 7B28 B
UCL
B 5 6 7B29 C
UNL S4
7B30 N
C 3 U 0N
7B25
3U0 3U0
N 7B23

Fig. 10.2.1 External wiring of voltage circuits

In the figure:

1ZKK1, 1ZKK2, 1ZKK3 are miniature circuit breaker;

154 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

UAH, UBH, UCH, UNH come from HV side;


UAM, UBM, UCM, UNM come from MV side;
UAL, UBL, UCL, UNL come from LV side.
Fig. 10.2.2.2 shows external wiring of CT circuits.

TA1
IAS1
A 8B2
IBS1
B 8B4
ICS1
C 8B6
INS1 SIDE 1
N 8B1
8B3
TA2 8B5
IAS2 8B8
A
IBS2
B 8B10
ICS2
C 8B12 SIDE 2
INS2 8B7
N
8B9
TA3 8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I AS3
A 8B14
I BS3
B 8B16

RCS-978E
I CS3
C 8B18
I NS3 SIDE 3
N 8B13
8B15
TA4 8B17
IAS4
A 8C2
B IBS4
ICS4 8C4
C 8C6
INS4 SIDE 4
N 8C1
8C3
TA5 8C5
IACW 8C8
A
IBCW 8C10
B
ICCW 8C12 common
C
N INCW 8C7 winding
8C9
8C11
TA7
I01GapN 8C13
0 Gap ZS
I 01Gap
N 8C14 Curr. of
side1
TA9
I02GapN
0 8C15
I02Gap Gap ZS
N 8C16
Curr. of
AC CURRENT CIRCUIT

TA1 side2
0 I 0cwN
0 8C17
I0cw
RCS-978E

N 8C18 ZS CURR .
OF CW
TA6
0 I 01N 7C8
I01 ZS CURR .
N 7C7
OF side 1
TA8
I02N
0 7C10
I02
N 7C9 ZS CURR .
OF side 2

Fig. 10.2.2 External wiring of current circuits


In the figure:

IAS1, IBS1, ICS1, INS1 come from HV side;


IAS2, IBS2, ICS2, INS2 come from MV side;
IAS3, IBS3, ICS3, INS3 come from LV side;
IAS4, IBS4, ICS4, INS4 come from LV side;

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 155


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

IACW , IBCW , ICCW , INCW come from COMMON WINDING;


I01GAP, I01GAPN come from GAP CT7 on side1;
I02GAP, I02GAPN come from GAP CT9 on side1;
I0CW , I0CWN come from neutral point of COMMON WINDING;
I01, I01N come from neutral point on side 1;
I02, I02N come from neutral point on side 2.

10.3 Checkout

10.3.1 General description of checkout


The RCS-978 serial transformer protection equipment is fully numerical and the hardware is
continuously monitored. Commissioning tests can be kept to a minimum and need only include
hardware tests and conjunctive tests. The function tests are carried out according to user’s
correlative regulations. In these tests, user interfaces on the front panel of the relay or local PC
can be fully applied.

Test personnel must be familiar with general relay test practices and safety precautions to avoid
personal injuries or equipment damage.

The following tests are necessary to ensure the equipment’s normal operation before the
equipment is first put into use.

− Hardware tests
These tests are performed for the following hardware to ensure that there is no hardware
defect. Defects of hardware circuits other than the following can be detected by
self-monitoring when the DC power is supplied.
− User interfaces test
− Binary input circuits and output circuits test
− AC input circuits test
− Function tests
These tests are performed for the following functions that are fully software-based. Tests
of the protection schemes and fault locator require a dynamic test set.
− Measuring elements test
− Timers test
− Metering and recording test
− Conjunctive tests
The tests are performed after the relay is connected with the primary equipment and other
external equipment.
− On load test
− Phase sequence check and polarity check.

10.3.2 Safety precautions and cautions before tests

Enough attention must be paid on following items.

1) The relay rack is provided with a grounding terminal. Before starting the work, always
ensure that the relay rack is grounded.
2) Before checking the interior of the relay, be sure to turn off the power.

156 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

Note: Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.

3) When the power is on, do not connect/disconnect any cable with the equipment.
4) When the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
5) Before turning on the power, check and ensure that the polarity and voltage of the power
supply are correct.

10.3.3 Preparations

10.3.3.1 Test equipment

Minimum equipments required:


− Multifunctional current and voltage test set with interval timer;
− Multimeter with suitable AC current range, and AC/DC voltage ranges.

Note: Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features in one unit.

Optional equipment:
− An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a DC output not exceeding 500 V (for
insulation resistance test when required);
− A personal PC, with DBG2000 and RCS-232 binary input wire;
− A printer.
10.3.3.2 Relay settings

Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings. For the default settings, we can get it through the DBG-2000 assistant
software, and the use method is mentioned in chapter 7.
10.3.3.3 Visual inspection

After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the relay case. If there is any damage, the
internal module might also have been affected, contact the vendor. Following items listed is
necessary.

− Protection panel

Carefully examine the protection panel, protection equipment inside and other parts inside to
see that no physical damage has occurred since installation.

The rated information of other auxiliary protections should be checked to ensure it is correct
for the particular installation.

− Panel wiring

Check the conducting wire used in the panel to assure that their cross section meet the
requirement.

Carefully examine the wiring to see that they are no connection failure exists.

− Label

Check all the isolator binary inputs, terminal blocks, indicators, switches and push buttons to
make sure that their labels meet the requirements of this project.

− Equipment plug-in modules

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 157


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

Check each plugin module of the equipments on the panel to make sure that they are well
installed into the equipment without any screw loosened.

− Earthing cable

Check whether the earthing cable from the panel terminal block is safely screwed to the panel
steel sheet.

− Switch, keypad, isolator binary inputs and push button:

Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary inputs and push buttons
work normally and smoothly.

10.3.3.4 Local PC

When using a local PC, connect it with the relay via the RS-232 port on the front of the equipment.
DBG-2000 software is required to run the PC. For the details, refer to Appendix B.

10.3.4 Hardware tests


The tests can be performed without external wiring, but DC power supply and AC voltage and
current source are required.

10.3.4.1 User Interfaces

This test ensures that the LCD, LEDs and keys function correctly.

l LCD display

Only apply the rated DC voltage and check whether the LCD displays normal operation status
report as mentioned former. If there is a failure, i.e. VT fail because of not applying voltage, the
LCD displays failure report. If the LCD displays failure report, press the ECS key for 1 second and
the LCD will return to normal operation status report.

l LED indicator

Apply the rated DC voltage and check that the "HEALTHY" LED is lighting in green. We need to
emphasize that the "HEALTHY" LED is always lighting in operation course except that the
equipment find serious problems listed in chapter 8.

l Keypad

Press “ESC” key and enter the command menu. Do some jobs to ensure that all buttons are in
good condition.

10.3.4.2 Check of binary input circuits

Check the connections to the binary inputs so that both input levels and polarity are in accordance
with terminal specifications. Check whether all the switches, equipment keypad, isolator binary
inputs and push buttons work normally and smoothly.

1) “SIG RESET” button in the front of the rack

Press “SIG RESET” button in the front of the rack, the tripping LED can be reset if it is lighting and
the contents displayed in LCD will not change until pressing time is over one second.

2) “Print” button in the front of the rack

Press “Print” button in front of the rack, the LCD displays “printing” if the printer is connected with

158 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

equipment correctly and the relevant parameters are set. If the printer doesn’t exist or it haven’t
been connected with equipment correctly or the relevant parameters are not set correctly, the LCD
will return to the contents before “printing” after a short time delay.

3) Functionality binary input protection

For single equipment, we should connect the optical power with DC before binary input test, they
are 4B17-2B29 for 24 V positive pole and 4B16-2B30 for 24 V negative pole.

We can observe the changing status in “SWITCH INPUT” command menu to make sure whether
they are all right when we open or close the contacts in turns. The functionality binary inputs are
listed in below table.

Functionality binary input of RCS-978E


Terminal Signal name (display) Rack terminal CPU status MON status
2B29-2B7 Diff. Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B26 WindingDiff Prot ContactInput
4B25-4B25 Backup ContactInput5
2B29-2B17 Side1 OC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B22 Side1 ROC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B13 Side1 Gap Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B9 Side2 OC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B10 Side2 ROC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B14 Side2 Gap Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B8 Side3 OC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B12 Side4 OC Prot. ContactInput
2B29-2B11 ComWind BakProt. ContactInput
2B29-2B15 Side4 VT Out of Service
2B29-2B19 Side3 VT Out of Service
2B29-2B18 Side2 VT Out of Service
2B29-2B16 Side1 VT Out of Service
2B29-2B24 Backup ContactInput4
2B29-2B23 Backup ContactInput3
2B29-2B21 Backup ContactInput2

Note: The equipment will generate switch input report and display it in LCD. After about 5 second, the
report displaying in LCD will return to normal display.

4) External HV binary input

The binary input listed below are energized by the same as power supply of relay 4B25 as positive
pole.
External strong power switch input
Switch input
No. Equipment terminal Rack terminal CPU status MON status
signal
1 4B17-4B12 Monitor Comm. Blk
2 4B17-4B13 Print BinaryInput
3 4B17-4B14 Time Pulse Signal
4 4B25-4B21 Side1 BreakerOff

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 159


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

5 4B25-4B22 Side2 BreakerOff

10.3.4.3 Communication port

This test should only be performed where the protection is to be accessed from a remote location
and will vary depending on the communications standard being adopted.

It is not the intention of the test to verify the operation of the complete system from the relay to the
remote location, just the protection’s rear communications port and any protocol converter
necessary.

l Local communications
Ensure that the RS-232 wire link the RS-232 port in front panel of the RCS-978 and the PC
computer, and the communication baud rate in DBG2000 must be set as “ 9600 ”.

Check that communications can be established with this protection using the personal PC.

l Remote communication
This test is to check the status of communications between RCS-978 and the engineers
workstation in substation automation system if it is applicable. Before test, the communication
baud rate in RCS-978 must be set as “4800-57600 ” depends on substation automation system,
and the protection’s ‘Device Comm. Addr.’ must be set to a value between 1 and 254.

In the menu of ‘DEBUG’->’Comm. STATUS’ on the LCD display, “485A” or “485B” indicates the
communication status of RS-485 port1 or port2, and if ‘Valid Frame’ is ‘N’, it indicates the setting
error of baud rate or protocol while if “Valid Address” is “N”, it means the communication address is
set wrongly. If ”Send Data” is ”N” , that means datagram sent from the equipment is wrong. If all
those status is ‘Y’, it means communication is established successfully.

10.3.4.4 Check of VT circuits

This test verifies that the accuracy of voltage measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

This test can be performed by applying rated voltage to each voltage transformer input of the
RCS-978 in turn and check its magnitude by using a multimeter.

The corresponding reading can then be checked either in the protection’s CPU SAMPLE column
or a personal computer connected to the front communication port with software DBG2000.

The measured voltage values on the protection LCD or a personal PC connected to the front
communication port will be in secondary volts.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is ±1%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

This test can be performed by applying the checking voltages to the AC input circuits and verifying
that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The test circuit for RCS-978 series is shown in Fig. 10.3.1. A micro-computer based tester which
can provide three-phase voltage at least is required. The below is an example of HV side voltage
test.

160 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

RCS-978C AC module
UAs1
A 1 2 7B2 A
U a∠ 0o UBs1
3 1ZKK1 4 7B4 B
B UCs1 S1
5 6 7B6 C
U b ∠ − 120 o UNs1
7B8 N
C 3U0Ns1
7B13
U c ∠ 120 o 3U0s1 3U0
N 7B11
N
U 0 ∠0 o
0

tester

UAs2

AC voltage Circuit
A 1 2 7B10 A
U a∠0 o UBs2

RCS-978C
3 1ZKK2 4 7B12 B
UCs2 S2
B
5 6 7B14 C
U b ∠ − 120 o
UNs2
7B16 N
C 3U0Ns2
7B17
U c ∠ 120 o 3U0s2 3U0
N 7B15
N
U 0 ∠0 o

tester

UAs3
A 1 2 7B18 A
U a∠ 0o UBs3
3 1ZKK3 4 7B20 B
UCs3
B 5 6 7B22 C
UNs3 S3
U b ∠ − 120 o
7B24 N
C 3U0Ns3
7B21
U c ∠ 120 o 3U0s3 3U0
N 7B19
N
U 0 ∠0 o

tester

UAs4
A 1 2 7B27 A
U a∠0 o UBs4
3 1ZKK3 4 7B28 B
B UCs4
5 6 7B29 C
UNs4 S4
U b ∠ − 120 o
7B30 N
C 3U0Ns4
7B25
U c ∠ 120 o 3U0s4
3U0
N 7B23
N
U 0 ∠0 o

tester

Fig. 10.3.1 Voltage circuit checking


l Linearity and precision checkout

Inject three-phase voltages (the reference value is provided in the following test table) into HV side,
MV side and LV side voltage channel respectively, and verify that the values applied coincide with
the values displayed on the LCD screen. Of course, we should enter the “STATUS” command
menu and then “CPUVALUE” and “MONVALUE” command submenu first, and observe the values
in these two command submenus. Not only magnitude, but also phase angle are all our
concerned.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 161


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

Linearity and precision checkout


Displayed on LCD
No. Items Input value Angle between Angle between
Phase A Phase B Phase C
A and B A and C
60V
1 Side1 voltage
20V
60V
2 side 2 voltage
20V
60V
3 Side 3 voltage
20V
60V
4 Side 3 voltage
20V

30V
5 Side1 ZS voltage 100V
180V
30V
6 Side2 ZS voltage 100V
180V
10V
7 Side3 ZS voltage 50V
100V
10V
8 Side4 ZS voltage 50V
100V

l Check of the earthing of the VT circuits.

Single earthing but not multi-earthing of VT circuit can ensure the correctness of protection relay’s
calculation of system fault.

l Charging load checkout

That the VT’s value displayed in LCD must be in agreement with real power system verifies the
correctness of VT circuit and the equipment’s VT input channel.

10.3.4.5 Check of CT circuits

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable tolerances.

This test can be performed by applying the checking currents to the AC input circuits and verifying
that the values applied coincide with the values displayed on the LCD screen.

The corresponding reading can then be checked either in the protection’s CPU SAMPLE column
or a personal computer connected to the front communication port with software DBG2000.

The measured current values displayed on the protection LCD or a personal PC connected to the
front communication port will be in secondary Amperes.

The measurement accuracy of the protection is ± 1%. However, an additional allowance must be
made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

The test circuit for RCS-978 series is shown in Fig. 10.3.2. A micro-computer based tester which

162 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

can provide three-phase current at least is required. We don’t need to care the protection
equipment’s response to the injected current, such as alarming or tripping and etc..

IAS1
A 8B2
IBS1
B 8B4
ICS1
C 8B6
INS1 SIDE 1
N 8B1
TESTER 8B3
8B5
IAS2 8B8
A
IBS2
B 8B10
ICS2
C 8B12 SIDE 2
N INS2 8B7
TESTER 8B9
8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I AS1
A 8B14
I BS3
B 8B16

RCS-978E
I CS3
C 8B18
I NS3 SIDE 3
N 8B13
TESTER 8B15
IAS4 8B17
A 8C2
IBS4
B ICS4 8C4
C 8C6
INS4 SIDE 4
N 8C1
TESTER 8C3
8C5
IACW 8C8
A
IBCW 8C10
B
ICCW 8C12 common
C
N INCW 8C7 winding
TESTER 8C9
8C11

N I01GapN 8C13
I01Gap Gap ZS
0 8C14 Curr. of
TESTER
side1
N I02GapN
8C15
I02Gap Gap ZS
0 8C16
TESTER Curr. of
AC CURRENT CIRCUIT

side2
N I0cwN 8C17
I0cw
RCS-978E

0 8C18 ZS CURR .
TESTER
OF CW

N I01N 7C8
I01 ZS CURR .
0 7C7
TESTER OF side 1

N I02N
7C10
I02
0 7C9 ZS CURR .
TESTER
OF side 2

Fig. 10.3.2 Current circuits checking

l Linearity and precision checkout

Inject three-phase current (the reference value is provided in the following test table) into HV side,
MV side and LV side current channel respectively, and verify that the values applied coincide with
the values displayed on the LCD screen. Of course, we should enter the “status” command menu
and then “CPU” and “MON” command sub menu first, and observe the values in these two
command submenus. Not only magnitude, not also phase angle are all our concerned.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 163


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

Current channel linearity and precision checkout


Input Displayed on LCD
No. Items Angle between Angle between
value Phase A Phase B Phase C
A and B A and C
In
1 phase current on side 1
4In
In
2 phase current on side 2
4In
In
3 phase current on side 3
4In
In
4 phase current on side 4
4In
In
5 phase current of CW
4In
In *******************
6 ZS current on side 1
4In *******************
In *******************
7 Gap ZS current on side 1
4In *******************
In *******************
8 ZS current on side 2
4In *******************
In *******************
9 Gap ZS current on side 2
4In *******************
In *******************
10 ZS current of CW
4In *******************

Note: In is the nominal secondary current of relative CTs.

Caution: To avoid damage the equipment, we can’t inject a huge value current (such as 4In or
more) to the equipment for long time. We suggest that the time in huge current
condition should not over 3 second everytime.

l Charging load checkout

That the CT’s value displayed in LCD must be in agreement with real power system verifies the
correctness of CT circuit and the equipment’s CT input channel.
Note: If the load current is less than 0.5In, the phase angle calculated in the protection equipment
and displayed in the LCD may not be correct. It doesn’t matter because that the phase angle
hasn’t any relation with protective functions. We can print normal record oscillograms which
can shows the latest five cycles’ voltage and current and it can help us to find out whether the
polarity of voltage and current is right.

Please refer to chapter 7 for operation method.


10.3.4.6 Check of output contacts

This test can be combined with function test. Be care of the coherence of tripping result and
its tripping matrix.
l Alarming and Blocking contacts BSJ check

The equipment will block itself and turn off the “HEALTHY” LED when it finds hardware fault or loss
of power, at the same time send out blocking signal BSJ. So the simple check method of this
function is to turn off power and check the BSJ contact.

164 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

l Alarm contacts BJJ check

The equipment will send alarming messages and light “alarming” LED when it finds such failures
as “longtime starting”, “mismatch starting”, “communication failure inside”, “CT circuit failure”, “VT
circuit failure” etc., at the same time it will send out alarming signal BJJ. So the simple check
method of this function is to “produce” failures for the equipment without damaging it. Detail test
method can be found in function test part.

Alarm and signal contacts are all instantaneous ones.

Alarm output contacts


No. Signal Local contacts Remote contacts Contacts for event Yes or NO
record
1 Equipment blocking 3A2-3A4 3A1-3A3 3B4-3B26
2 Equipment alarm 3A2-3A6 3A1-3A5 3B4-3B28
3 CT failure 3A2-3A8 3A1-3A7 3B4-3B6
4 VT failure 3A2-3A10 3A1-3A9 3B4-3B8
5 Over load alarm 3A2-3A12 3A1-3A11 3B4-3B10
6 Residual volt. on side 3 alarm III 3A2-3A14 3A1-3A13 3B4-3B12
7 Residual volt. on side 3 alarm IV 3A2-3A16 3A1-3A15 3B4-3B14
8 Protection of CW alarm 3A2-3A18 3A1-3A17 3B4-3B16
9 Protection on side 1 alarm 3A2-3A20 3A1-3A19 3B4-3B18
10 Protection on side 2 alarm 3A2-3A22 3A1-3A21 3B4-3B20
11 Protection on side 3 alarm 3A2-3A24 3A1-3A23 3B4-3B22
12 Protection on side 4 alarm 3A2-3A26 3A1-3A25 B4-3B24

l Tripping signal contacts check

Whenever one of the protection element operate and send out tripping command, the tripping
signal LED will be lit, and tripping signal relay also will pick up. “Tripping” LED and local signal
contacts latched by magnetic will remain closed until someone reset it by pushing “SIG RESET”
button in the front panel of the equipment, or pushing “SIG RESET” button in the front of the rack,
or remotely by SAS/SCADA system. Test method is provided in function test part.

Tripping signal contacts


No. Signal Local contacts Remote contacts Contacts for event Yes or NO
record
1 DIF tripping signal 2A1-2A3 2A2-2A6 2A4-2A8
2 Backup Prot. On side 1 trip 2A1-2A5 2A2-2A10 2A4-2A12
3 Backup Prot. On side 2 trip 2A1-2A7 2A2-2A14 2A4-2A16
4 Backup Prot. On side 3 trip 2A1-2A9 2A2-2A18 2A4-2A20
5 Backup Prot. On side 4 trip 2A1-2A11 2A2-2A22 2A4-2A24
6 Backup Prot. Of CW trip 2A1-2A13 2A2-2A26 2A4-2A28

l Tripping contacts check

Test method is introduced in function test part. Tripping matrix setting is described in chapter 6.

Tripping contacts
Terminals in Terminals Yes or NO
No. Tripping contacts
equipment in rack

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 165


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

1A02-1A04
1A06-1A08
1 Trip spare 3
1A10-1A12
1A14-1A16
1A18-1A20
2 Trip spare 4
1A22-1A24
1A26-1A28
1B2-1B4
3 Trip spare 5
1B6-1B8
1B10-1B12
1A03-1A05
1A07-1A09
4 Trip CB on side 1
1A11-1A13
1A15-1A17
1A19-1A21
1A23-1A25
5 Trip CB on side 2
1A27-1A29
1B01-1B03
6 Trip CB on side 3 1B17-1B19
7 Trip CB on side 4 1B21-1B23
1B5-1B7
8 Trip CB of bus coupler on side 1 1B9-1B11
1B13-1B15
9 Trip CB of bus coupler on side 2 1B29-1B30
10 Trip CB of bus section on side 3, 4 1B25-1B27
1B14-1B16
11 Spare 1
1B18-1B20
1B22-1B24
12 Trip CB of bus coupler on side 1
1B26-1B28

l Other output contacts check

Other output contacts


Terminals in Terminals
No. Other output contacts Yes or NO
equipment in rack
3A28-3A30
1 Stage 1 air cooling initiation
3A27-3A29
3B1-3B3
2 Stage 2 air cooling initiation
3B5-3B7
3B29-3B30
3 Voltage regulation blocked
3B25-3B27
3B09-3B11
4 Other output contacts (spare) 1
3B13-3B15
Operation of composite voltage element 2B17-2B19
5 2B21-2B23
for blocking busbar differential protection

166 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.4 Functional Test

10.4.1 Preparation for test


1) Printer: For printing fault report generated in test course.
2) Settings: Prepare test settings or input real settings.
3) Version of program: Confirm that the program version is correct.

10.4.2 Differential relay


l Preparation for differential protection test:

1) Calculate secondary rated current on each side.


2) Input coherent parameters of differential protection which described in parameter setting part
in chapter6.
3) Read calculated settings displayed in LCD such as correction coefficient on each side by
navigating the command menu.

l Test parameter (for reference only)

Parameter setting:
[Trans. Capa. IntPart]=180 MVA {power system parameter}
[Trans. Capa. DecPart]= 0 MVA {power system parameter}
[rated frequency]= 50 Hz {power system parameter}
[Ct Sec. Trated Curr.]= 5A {power system parameter}
[Side1 System Volt.]=220 kV ` {power system parameter}
[Side2 System Volt.]=110 kV {power system parameter}
[Side3 System Volt.]=10 kV {power system parameter}
[Side4 System Volt.]=10 kV {power system parameter}
[Side1 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr]=1000 {parameter of main protection}
[Side2 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr]=2000 {parameter of main protection}
[Side3 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr]=10000 {parameter of main protection}
[Side4 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr]=10000 {parameter of main protection}
[Diff. Pickup Curr.]=0.3Ie {parameter of main protection}
[Diff. Stabilizing Factor]=0.5 {parameter of main protection}
[2nd Harm Stab. Factor]=0.15 {parameter of main protection}
[3rd Harm Stab. Factor]=0.2 {parameter of main protection}
[Inst. Diff. Curr.] =4 Ie {parameter of main protection}
[Trans. Connection Mode]=2 {parameter of main protection}

Logic setting:
[Enable Diff. Protection]=1 {power system parameter}
[Ct Superv. BLK Diff]=0 {parameter of main protection}
[Inrush Blk Diff.]=0 {parameter of main protection}
[Diff. Prot. TripMatrix]=FIFTH {parameter of main protection}
[Enable Inst. Diff. Prot.]=1 {parameter of main protection}

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 167


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

[Enable Percent Diff. Prot.]=1 {parameter of main protection}

10.4.2.1 Unrestrained instantaneous differential relay

The aim of configuration of instantaneous differential protection for transformer is to accelerate the
trip speed in transformer’s inner fault. So the element does not need any block element, but the
settings should be greater than maximum inrush current.

1) Connect the equipment and tester

The following figure shows the connection way of injecting current on side 1. Similarly, the
current can be injected from side 2, side 3 and side 4.

IAS1
A 8B 2
IBS1
B 8B 4
C ICS1
8B 6
N INS1 S ID E1
8B 1
tes te r
8B 3
8B 5
IAS2 8B 8
A
B IBS2
8B 10
C ICS2
8B 12
N INS2 S ID E2
8B 7
8B 9
8B 11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I A S3
A 8B 14
B I B S3
8B 16 RCS-978E
C I C S3
8B 18
N I N S3 S ID E3
8B1 3
8B 15
I AS 4 8B 17
A 8 C2
B I BS 4
I CS 4 8 C4
C 8 C6
N I NS 4 S ID E4
8 C1
8 C3
8 C5
I A CW 8 C8
I B CW 8C 10
I C CW 8C 12 c om mon
I N CW 8 C7 wi nd ing
8 C9
8C 11

Fig.10.4.1 Instantaneous differential protection relay test connection

2) Calculate the rated current of transformer according to the formula

Sn 180 1000
I e2 = nLH = = 2.362 A
3U1n 3 * 220 5
3) Calculate the setting quantity

I = 2.362 * 4 = 9.448 A
4) Inject current according to setting

Inject 1.05 times standard current into the relay, the LCD “TRIP” will light and the screen will
show “Inst. Diff. Prot.” operation report.

Inject 0.95 times standard current into the relay, the LCD “TRIP” will not light and the screen
will only display “start”

168 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.4.2.2 Percentage differential protection relay test

The function of percentage differential protection is to react to all kinds of transformer inner fault
quickly; because of its high sensitivity, it may be influenced by many factors, such as CT saturation
conditions, transformer overexcited conditions, inrush current conditions etc. To avoid
maloperation result from these factors, it must be blocked by accessorial criterion, such as
harmonics.

Generally, the test is carried out between two sides.

Connection group of a transformer will influence the test method of differential protection. The
following contents give two methods according to the current channels that a tester can provide.
Based on wye-wye-12 connection group or wye-delta-11 connection group, 6 currents method and
3 currents method are described later in detail.

l 6 currents method

1) Wye-wye-12 connection (side 1 and side 2)

I A S1 8B2
A
B I B S1
8B4
C I C S1
8B6
N I N S1 8B1 SIDE1
8B3
8B5
I A S2 8B8
A
B I B S2 8B10
C I C S2 8B12
I N S2 SIDE2
N 8B7
8B9
tester 8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I AS 3 8B14
I BS 3
8B16
RCS-978E

I CS 3 8B18
I NS 3 SIDE3
8B13
8B15
8B17
I AS4 8C2
I BS4
8C4
I CS4
8C6
I NS4 8C1 SIDE4
8C3
8C5
IACW 8C8
IBCW 8C10
ICCW 8C12 common
INCW 8C7 winding
8C9
8C11

Fig. 10.4.2 Current method used between two wye sides

Calculate quantity of current injected:

Sn 180 1000
I e 2 HV = nLH = = 2.362 A
3U1n 3 * 220 5

Sn 180 2000
I e 2 MV = nLH = = 2.362 A
3U1n 3 * 110 5

The above calculation result tells us when 2.362 A current is injected into HV side, we must
injected 2.362 A into MV side to keep differential current balance. The two currents are all equal to

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 169


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

1 Ie to respective side. Here, the HV current must be same phase angle with MV current.

Inject current according to setting:

Inject three-phase symmetrical currents on HV side and MV side respectively to keep balance and
keep one fixed, change the phase angle of the other simultaneously from balance condition till the
differential current protection operates, note the differential current and restraint current at the
operated time, calculate restraint coefficient and compare the calculation result with the setting
[Diff. Stabilizing Factor], and get error value. The calculation formula is provided below.

I d > 0.2 I r + I cdqd I r ≤ 0.5 I e


I > K b1 [I r − 0.5I e ] + 0.1I e + I cdqd 0.5I e ≤ I r ≤ 6 I e
 d
I d > 0.75[I r − 6 I e ] + K b1 [5.5I e ] + 0.1I e + I cdqd I r > 6I e

 1 m
I r = ∑ Ii
2 i =1
 m
I
 d
= ∑I
i =1
i

I d > 0.6[ I r − 0.8 I e ] + 1.2 I e



I r > 0.8 I e

By adjusting the quantity of current of injected, we get differential operation point which belongs to
different slope, then the whole characteristic curve is finished.

In this test item, we can check tripping output contacts and tripping signal contacts by checking if
the contacts close just at the moment of differential protection operates. In fact, these contacts can
be checked in any protection function test. Of course, that which contact will close depends on
how to set its tripping matrix.

2) Wye-delta-11 connection (between side 1 and side 3)

170 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

IAS1 8B2
A
B IBS1
8B4
C ICS1
8B6
N INS1 8B1 SIDE1
8B3
8B5
IAS2 8B8
IBS2 8B10
ICS2 8B12
INS2 SIDE2
8B7
8B9
8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
IAS3 8B14
A
B IBS3
8B16

RCS-978E
C ICS3
8B18
N INS3 SIDE3
8B13
8B15
tester 8B17
IAS4
8C2
IBS4
8C4
ICS4
8C6
INS4 8C1 SIDE4
8C3
8C5
I AC W 8C8
I BC W 8C10
I CC W 8C12 common
I NC W 8C7 winding
8C9
8C11

Fig.10.4.3 Current method used between wye side and delta-side


Calculate quantity of current injected:

Sn 180 1000
I e 2 HV = nLH = = 2.362 A
3U1n 3 * 220 5

Sn 180 10000
I e 2 LV = nLH = = 5.196 A
3U1n 3 *10 5

The above calculation result tells us when 2.362 A current is injected into HV side, considering the
connection group coefficient, we must injected 3 × 5.196 = 9A into LV side to keep differential
current balance. The two currents are all equal to Ie to respective side. Here, the HV current is
leading to LV current 150°.

Inject current according to setting:

Inject three-phase symmetrical currents on HV side and MV side respectively to keep balance and
keep one fixed, change the phase angle of the other simultaneously from balance condition till the
differential current protection operates, note the differential current and restraint current at the
operating time, calculate restraint coefficient and compare the calculation result with the setting
[Diff. Stabilizing Factor], and get error value. The calculation formula is same to wye-wye
connection.

By adjusting the quantity or phase angle of current injected, we get differential operation point
which belongs to different slope, then the whole characteristic curve is finished.

l 3 currents method

1) Wye-wye-12 connection (branch 1 on side 1 and side 2)

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 171


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

I AS1
8B2
I BS1
8B4
A I CS1
8B6
B I NS1 SIDE1
8B1
C
N 8B3
8B5
I AS2 8B8
I BS2
tester 8B10
I CS2 8B12
I NS2 SIDE2
8B7
8B9
8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I AS1
8B14
I BS3
8B16

RCS-978E
I CS3
8B18
I NS3 SIDE3
8B13
8B15
8B17
IAS4
8C2
IBS4
8C4
ICS4
8C6
INS4 SIDE4
8C1
8C3
8C5
I A CW 8C8
I B CW 8C10
I C CW 8C12 common
I N CW 8C7 winding
8C9
8C11

Fig. 10.4.4 Current method used between two wye sides

Calculate quantity of current injected:

The calculation method is same as 6 currents method.

Inject current according to setting:

Inject single phase current on HV side and MV side respectively to keep balance, keep one fixed,
change the phase angle of the other simultaneously from balance condition till the differential
current protection operates, note the differential current and restraint current at the operating time,
calculate restraint coefficient and compare the calculation result with the setting [Diff. Stabilizing
Factor], and get error value. The calculation formula is same to that of 6-current method.

By adjusting the quantity of current of injected, we get differential operation point which belongs to
different slope, then the whole characteristic curve is finished.
Note: Although inject single phase current from tester into one side, due to special connection way,
the equipment feel two phase currents, so two phase differential current element will operate
when operation condition is satisfied. Injecting two phases currents into wye side is to eliminate
the influence of I0. (Refer to differential protection theory part in chapter 3 ).

Although inject single phase current from tester into one side, due to special connection way, the
equipment feel two phase currents, so two phase differential current element will operate when
operation condition is satisfied. Injecting two phases currents into wye side is to eliminate the
influence of I0. (Refer to differential protection theory part in chapter 3 ).

2) Wye-delta-11 connection (side 1 and side 3)

172 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

I AS1 8B2
I BS1
8B4
A I CS1
8B6
B I NS1 SIDE1
8B1
C
N 8B3
8B5
I AS2 8B8
I BS2 8B10
tester I CS2 8B12
I NS2 SIDE2
8B7
8B9
8B11

AC CURRENT CIRCUIT
I A S1 8B14
I B S3
8B16

RCS-978E
I C S3 8B18
I N S3 SIDE3
8B13
8B15
8B17
I AS4
8C2
I BS4
8C4
I CS4
8C6
I NS4 8C1 SIDE4
8C3
8C5
I ACW 8C8
I BCW 8C10
I CCW 8C12 common
I NCW 8C7 winding
8C9
8C11

Fig. 10.4.5 Current method used between wye side and delta side

Calculate quantity of current injected:

The calculation method is same to 6-currents method.

Inject current according to setting:

Inject single phase current on HV side and LV side respectively to keep balance, keep one fixed,
change the phase angle of the other simultaneously from balance condition till the differential
current protection operates, note the differential current and restraint current at the operating time,
calculate restraint coefficient and compare the calculation result with the setting [Diff. Stabilizing
Factor], and get error value. The calculation formula is same to that of 6-current method.

By adjusting the quantity of current of injected, we get differential operation point which belongs to
different slope, then the whole characteristic curve is finished.
Note: Although inject single phase current from tester into one side, due to special connection way,
the equipment feel two phase currents, so two phase differential current elements will operate
when operation condition is satisfied. Injecting two phases currents into wye side is to
eliminate the influence of I0 on wye side. (Refer to differential protection theory part in chapter
3)

Generally, at least six points should be found to get three slope characteristic curve of differential
protection.

10.4.2.3 Second harmonics blocking logic test

Inject single phase fundamental current greater than the pickup setting of differential protection
[Diff. Pickup Curr.] and a 2nd harmonic current of about 20 % (Suppose the restraint coefficient
of second harmonics setting [2nd Harm. Stab. Factor] is 0.15) on any of three sides. If setting
[Inrush Blk Diff] is set as “0”, the differential protective function shall be blocked by the second

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 173


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

harmonic blocking element. Decreasing 2nd harmonics slowly down to below the setting,
differential protection will operate.

10.4.2.4 Third harmonics blocking logic test

Inject single phase fundamental current greater than the pickup setting of differential protection
[Diff. Pickup Curr.] and a 3rd harmonic current of about 25% (Suppose the restraint coefficient of
third harmonics setting [3rd Harm. Stab. Factor] is 0.2) on any of three sides. If setting [Inrush
Blk Diff] is set as “0”, the differential protection function shall be blocked by the third harmonic
blocking element. Decreasing 3rd harmonics slowly down to below the setting, differential
protection will operate.
Note: In this test, parameter [Disable Adaptive Infush Threshold] in equipment parameters table
should be set as “1”.

10.4.2.5 Fifth harmonics blocking logic test

Inject single phase fundamental current greater than the pickup setting of differential protection
[Diff. Pickup Curr.] and a 5th harmonic current of about 40% (because of fixed 35% restraint
coefficient) on any of three sides. The differential protection function shall be blocked by the fifth
harmonic blocking element due to the blocking function is always enabled in differential protection
logic. Decreasing 5th harmonics slowly down to below the fixed setting, differential protection will
operate.

10.4.2.6 CT circuit failure blocking logic test

l Setting preparation

In addition to the parameter list at the beginning of differential protective function test, we still need
set [CT Superv. Blk Diff] to finish this logic.

As described in chapter 3, if [CT Superv. Blk Diff] is set as “0”, the percentage differential
protection, residual differential protection and common-and-serial-windings differential protection
will not be blocked by CT circuit failure.

If [CT Superv. Blk Diff] is set as “1”, these protective elements will be blocked except the
percentage differential protection expressed by (3-3-7).

If [CT Superv. Blk Diff] is set as “2”, the percentage differential protection, residual differential
protection and common-and-serial-windings differential protection will be blocked by CT circuit
failure without exception.

No matter what [CT Superv. Blk Diff] is, the DPFC percentage differential relay is always blocked
by CT circuit failure.

l Test method

Inject currents on two side and keep them balance according to the method mentioned in 10.4.2.2.
The current should be greater than the setting [Diff. Pickup Curr.] or greater than 1.2Ie which
depends on how [CT Superv. Blk Diff] is set.

Decrease one of the two current to zero suddenly, then the differential current and restraint current
will satisfy the differential protection operation equation, but the differential protection will not send
out tripping command. That is the result of CT blocking logic.

174 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.4.3 DPFC differential relay test


Test method of DPFC differential protection is similar to the differential relay. But we have to point
out that it is difficult to take a quantitative test of the logic accurately on site, so user only need to
take a qualitative test on site. Injecting enough current till the DPFC differential current operates
can verify the correctness of the logic.

10.4.4 Residual percentage differential relay test


Residual percentage differential protection used in autotransformer is based on current balance
(First Kirchhoff’s Law) instead of Ampere-turn balance. The test is rather simple. First, choose any
two sides in HV side, MV side and common winding. Inject single same phase current on both end
and keep on fixed, change the phase angle of the other from balance condition till the residual
differential current protection operates, note the differential current and restraint current at the
operating time, calculate restraint coefficient and compare the calculation result with the setting
[WD Stabilizing Factor ], and get error value. Please refer to chapter 3 for the calculation formula.

10.4.5 Common-and-serial-windings differential protection relay test for


auto-transformer
This test is very similar to residual differential protection. The only one difference between
common-and-serial-windings differential protection and residual differential protection is that the
later use residual current on each side in differential protection logic but the former use phase
currents.

10.4.6 Overcurrent relay test


Directional overcurrent protection with composite voltage control:
1) Connect the tester for injection of symmetrical 3-phase currents to the appropriate current
terminals of RCS-978 and symmetrical 3-phase voltages to the appropriate voltage terminals.
2) Set the phase currents to lag the phase voltages by an angle equal to the set relay
characteristic angle (RCA) if transformer directional function is selected (set [Oc Zone n Blk
By Direction] as 1,if available). If reverse directional function is selected, set the phase
currents to lag the phase voltages by an angle equal to RCA +180 degrees.
3) Increase the current in fault phase until the low set stage operates.
4) Decrease the current slowly and check the dropout value.
5) Block high set stage if the injection current will activate the high set stage when test the low
set stage according to below.
6) Connect a trip output contact to the timer.
7) Set the current to 120% of the operate value of low set stage, switch on the current and check
the time delay. For inverse time curves, check the minimum operate time at a current equal to
110% of the operating current
8) Check that trip and start contacts operate according to the tripping output logic setting.
9) Reverse the direction of the injection current and check that the protection does not operate.
10) Check with low polarization voltage (positive sequence voltage) that the function becomes
nondirectional or blocked according to the setting [VT Supervision Criterion].
11) Remove the blocking of the high set stage and check the operate and dropout value and the
time delay for the high set stage in the same way as for the low set stage.
12) Finally check that start and trip information is stored in the REPORT menu.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 175


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.4.6.1 Directional earth fault current function

1) Connect the tester for single-phase current injection to the appropriate terminals and
symmetrical 3-phase voltages to the appropriate voltage terminals.
2) Set the parameter [Roc Zeon n Blk By Direction ] as 1.
3) Set the fault phase voltage to 30V and set the injection fault phase current to lag the residual
voltage by an angle equal to the set relay characteristic angle if system directional function is
selected (the parameter [Roc Direction Option] is set as “0”). If reverse directional function
is selected (the parameter [Roc Direction Option] is set as “1”), set the angle of the injection
current by adding 180 degrees.
4) Increase the current in fault phase and note the operating value of the low set stage.
5) Decrease the current slowly and note the dropout value.
6) Block the high set stage by setting the tripping matrix of the high set stage if the injection
current will activate the high set stage when testing the low set stage according to below.
7) Connect a trip output contact to the timer.
8) Set the current to 120% of the operate value of the low set stage, switch on the current and
check the time delay. For inverse time curves, check the minimum operate time at a current
equal to 110% of the operate current.
9) Check that all trip and start contacts operate according to the tripping output logic setting.
10) Reverse the direction of the injection current and check that the protection does not operate.
11) Check that the protection does not operate when the residual voltage is zero.
12) Remove the blocking of the high set stage and check the operating, dropout value and the
time delay for this stage in the same way as for the low set stage.
13) Finally check that start and trip information is stored in the Event menu.

10.4.6.2 Check of the nondirectional current function

Check in principle as instructed above, without applying any residual voltage. At the same time,
parameter [Roc Zeon n Blk By Direction] is set as “0”.

10.4.7 On-load test


After repeating the energization process for several times and no fault is found inside the
transformer, a test with real load current through the power transformer constitutes a final check. If
the current circuit are correctly connected and balanced, the differential current will be very small
when the power transformer is in the case of fully operational condition. By entering the command
menu and observing the magnitudes and phase angles of sampled data displayed on LCD, user
can find whether there are polarity errors of the current circuits or not.

Sometimes, the primary current is not big enough to the equipment to calculate angles correctly.
At this time, the PRESENT OSCILLOG (present waveform printing) function can help user to
judge the correctness of polarity of voltages and currents. This function together with normal
differential current printing, normal residual current printing, current and voltage of all sides printing,
amplitude of various waveforms calculation, and present binary input printing are very useful to
various tests and checks during commissioning on site.
Note: For assuring the precision of calculated angles, the angles value is only displayed correctly
when the current is more than 0.1In and the voltage is more than 0.05Un, otherwise they will be
displayed as a random value.

176 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

10.5 Putting RCS-978E into Service

The following procedure must be adhered to when putting the relay into service after finishing
commissioning or maintenance tests.

− Check that all external connections are correct.


− Check the setting of all measuring elements, timers, scheme switches, recordings and clock
are correct. In particular, when settings are changed temporarily for test, be sure to restore
them.
− Check that the green "HEALTHY" LED is lit and no other LEDs are lit on the front panel.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 177


Chapter 10 Installation and Test

178 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

Appendix A Setting Sheet

A.1 Equipment Settings

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 group number Active Group
2 number of the equipment Equipment Name
3 communication address Equipment Comm. Addr.
4 bit rate of port 1 Comm. Port1 Baud Rate
5 bit rate of port 2 Comm. Port2 Baud Rate
6 bit rate of printer Printer Baud Rate
7 automatic printing Automatic Print Option
8 network printer Network Printer Option
9 communication protocol Comm. Protocol Option
10 remote configuration Enable Remote Modify Setting
11 maintenance status setting Enable Monitor Comm. Blk
12 inrush current floating threshold disabled Disable Adaptive InrushThreshold

A.2 Power System Settings

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 integer part of transformer capacity Trans. Capa. IntPart
2 decimal part of transformer capacity Trans. Capa. DecPart
3 rated power frequency Rated Frequency
4 secondary rating current of CT CT Sec. Rated Curr
5 secondary of backup CT6 on side 1 S1 ZS CT6 Sec RatedCurr
6 rated current of “gap” residual CT7 secondary circuit on S1 Gap ZS CT7 Sec
transformer side 1 RatedCurr
7 rated current of residual CT8 secondary circuit on
S2 ZS CT8 Sec. RatedCurr
transformer side 2
8 rated current of “gap” residual CT9 secondary circuit on S2 Gap ZS CT9 Sec
transformer side 2 RatedCurr
9 rated current of residual CT10 secondary circuit on
CW ZS CT10 Sec. RatedCurr
transformer common winding side
10 rated current of residual CT6 primary circuit on Side 1 S1 ZS CT6 Pri. RatedCurr
11 rated current of “gap” residual CT7 primary circuit on
S1 Gap ZS CT7 Pri RatedCurr
side I
12 rated current of residual CT8 primary circuit on Side 2 S2 ZS CT8 Pri. RatedCurr
13 rated current of “gap” residual CT9 primary circuit on
S2 Gap ZS CT9 Pri RatedCurr
side 2
14 rated current of residual CT10 primary circuit on
CW ZS CT10 Pri. RatedCurr
transformer common winding side
15 secondary rated voltage of VT VT Sec. Rated Volt.
16 rated voltage of residual VT1 secondary circuit on
S1 ZS VT1 Sec. Rated Volt.
transformer side 1
17 rated voltage of residual VT2 secondary circuit on S2 ZS VT2 Sec. Rated Volt.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 179


Appendix A Setting Sheet

transformer side 2
18 rated voltage of residual VT3 secondary circuit on
S3 ZS VT3 Sec. Rated Volt.
transformer side 3
19 rated voltage of residual VT4 secondary circuit on
S4 ZS VT4 Sec. Rated Volt.
transformer side 4
20 primary voltage of PT1 on side 1 S1 VT1 Pri. Rated Volt.
21 primary voltage of PT2 on side 2 S2 VT2 Pri. Rated Volt.
22 primary voltage of PT3 on side 3 S3 VT3 Pri. Rated Volt.
23 primary voltage of PT4 on side 4 S3 VT3 Pri. Rated Volt.
24 primary voltage on side 1 Side1 System Volt.
25 primary voltage on side 2 Side2 System Volt.
26 primary voltage on side 3 Side3 System Volt.
27 primary voltage on side 4 Side4 System Volt.
28 connection mode of transformer Trans. Connection Mode
Logic settings
29 main protection enabled Enable Diff. Protection
30 backup protection on side 1 enabled Enable Side1 BakProt
31 backup protection on side 2 enabled Enable Side2 BakProt
32 backup protection on side 3 enabled Enable Side3 BakProt
33 backup protection on side 4 enabled Enable Side4 BakProt
34 backup protection of common winding enabled Enable ComWind BakProt

A.3 Settings of Main Protection

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 primary current of CT1 on side 1 Side1 CT1 Pri. RatedCurr
2 primary current of CT2 on side 2 Side2 CT2 Pri. RatedCurr
3 primary current of CT3 on side 3 Side3 CT3 Pri RatedCurr
4 primary current of CT4 on side 4 Side4 CT4 Pri RatedCurr
5 common winding CT5 primary rated current ComWind CT5 Pri. Rated Curr
6 differential current fault detector Diff. Pickup Curr.
7 restraint factor of percentage differential protection Diff. Stabilizing Factor
8 restraint factor of second harmonics 2nd Harm. Stab. Factor
9 restraint factor of third harmonics 3rd Harm. Stab. Factor
10 unrestraint differential protection Inst. Diff. Curr.
11 differential current alarm Diff. CT Superv. Alarm
12 residual or per side diff. current fault detector REF Pickup Curr.
13 restraint factor of residual or per side differential
REF Stabilizing Factor
current fault detector
Logic settings
14 differential protection blocked by CT supervision CT Superv. Blk Diff.
15 zero sequence or per side differential protection
CT Superv. Blk REF
blocked by CT supervision
16 Inrush current block differential current protection mode Inrush Blk Diff.
17 tripping logic setting of differential protection of main
Diff. Prot. TripMatrix
transformer

180 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

18 unrestraint differential protection enabled Enable Inst. Diff. Prot.


19 percentage differential protection enabled Enable Percent Diff.Prot.
20 residual or per side differential prot. enabled Enable REF Prot.
21 DPFC differential protection enabled Enable DPFC Diff. Prot.
22 overexcitation ratio reference OverExci. Ratio Reference
23 third harmonics blocking enabled Enable3rd Harm.Blk Diff.

A.4 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 1

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 pickup current Pickup Curr.
2 pickup current of calculated residual current Pickup ZS Curr.
3 pickup current of external true residual current Pickup Extern ZS Curr.
4 pickup value of “gap” residual overcurrent Pickup Gap ZS Curr.
5 pickup value of residual voltage Pickup ZS Volt.
6 negative sequence voltage setting for composite
NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk
voltage blocking element
7 residual voltage setting of composite voltage
LowVolt. for Comp.Volt.Blk
blocking element
8 current setting of overcurrent prot. stage 1 OC Stage1 Curr.
9 time stage 1 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay 1
10 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix1
11 time stage 2 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay 2
12 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix2
13 current setting of overcurrent prot. stage 2 OC Stage2 Curr.
14 time stage 1 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 Delay 1
15 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix1
16 time stage 2 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 Delay 2
17 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix2
18 current setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Curr.
19 time stage 1 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay 1
20 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix1
21 time stage 2 of OC protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay 2
22 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix2
23 residual voltage block ROC ZS Volt. Blk ROC
24 current setting of residual overcurrent
ROC Stage1 Curr.
protection (ROC) stage 1
25 time stage 1 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 Delay 1
26 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 TripMatrix1
27 time stage 2 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 Delay 2
28 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 TripMatrix2
29 current setting of residual overcurrent protection
ROC Stage2 Curr.
(ROC) stage 2
30 time stage 1 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay 1
31 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix1

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 181


Appendix A Setting Sheet

32 time stage 2 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay 2


33 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix2
34 time stage 3 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay3
35 trip matrix of stage 3 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix3
36 current setting of residual overcurrent protection
ROC Stage3 Curr.
(ROC) stage 3
37 time stage 1 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 Delay 1
38 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 TripMatrix1
39 time stage 2 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 Delay 2
40 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 TripMatrix2
41 voltage setting of gap residual over voltage
Gap ROV Volt.
protection (Gap ROV)
42 time stage 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 1
43 trip matrix of stage 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV TripMatrix1
44 time stage 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 2
45 trip matrix of stage 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV TripMatrix2
46 current setting of gap residual over current
Gap ROC Curr.
protection (Gap ROC)
47 time stage 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 1
48 trip matrix of stage 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC TripMatrix1
49 time stage 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 2
50 trip matrix of stage 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC TripMatrix2
51 pickup value of inverse time definite overcurrent
InvTime OC Curr.
protection
52 delay of inverse time definite overcurrent prot. InvTime OC Delay
53 tripping logic setting of inverse time definite
InvTime OC TripMatrix
overcurrent protection
54 pickup value of inverse time definite residual
InvTime ROC Curr.
overcurrent protection
55 delay of inverse time definite residual overcurrent
InvTime ROC Delay
protection
56 tripping logic setting of inverse time definite residual
InvTime ROC TripMatrix
overcurrent protection
57 current setting of overload stage 1 OverLoad Stage1 Curr.
58 time setting of overload stage 1 OverLoad Stage1 Delay
59 current setting of overload stage 2 OverLoad Stage2 Curr.
60 time setting of overload stage 2 OverLoad Stage2 Delay
61 current setting of air cooling initiating stage 1 CoolerStart Stage1 Curr.
62 time setting of air cooling initiating stage 1 CoolerStart Stage1 Delay
63 current setting of air cooling initiating stage 2 CoolerStart Stage2 Curr.
64 time setting of air cooling initiating stage2 CoolerStart Stage2 Delay
65 overload block tap changer OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch
66 time setting of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch] OverLoad Delay Blk TapSwitch
Logic setting
67 OC stage 1 blocked by composite voltage OC Stage1 Blk by CompVolt
68 OC stage 2 blocked by composite voltage OC Stage2 Blk by CompVolt
69 OC stage 3 blocked by composite voltage OC Stage3 Blk by CompVolt

182 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

70 OC stage 1 blocked by direction OC Stage1 Blk by Direction


71 OC stage 2 blocked by direction OC Stage2 Blk by Direction
72 OC stage1 direction option OC Stage1 Direction Option
73 OC stage 2 direction option OC Stage2 Direction Option
74 ROC stage 1 blocked by residual volt. ROC Stage1 Blk by ZSVolt
75 ROC stage 2 blocked by residual volt. ROC Stage2 Blk by ZSVolt
76 ROC stage 1 blocked by direction ROC Stage1 Blk by Direction
77 ROC stage 2 blocked by direction ROC Stage2 Blk by Direction
78 ROC stage 1 direction option ROC Stage1 Direction Option
79 ROC stage 2 direction option ROC Stage2 Direction Option
80 residual current option for residual direction ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir.
81 ROC stage 1 blocked by harmonics ROC Stage1 Blk by Harm.
82 ROC stage 2 blocked by harmonics ROC Stage2 Blk by Harm.
83 residual current option for ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 ZSCurr Option
84 residual current option for ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 ZSCurr Option
85 gap protection option Gap Protection Option
86 overload stage 1 enabled Enable OverLoad Stage1
87 overload stage 2 enabled Enable OverLoad Stage2
88 cooler start stage 1 enabled Enable CoolerStart Stage1
89 cooler start stage 2 enabled Enable CoolerStart Stage2
90 [overload block tap changer] enabled Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch
91 VT supervision criterion VT Supervision Criterion
92 local VT out of service VT Out of Service
93 OC blocked by side 2 composite voltage OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt
94 OC blocked by side 3 composite voltage OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt
95 OC blocked by side 4 composite voltage OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt
96 inverse time definite overcurrent protection
InvTime OC Blk by Dir.
blocked by direction
97 inverse time definite overcurrent protection
InvTime OC Direction Opt
direction
98 enable Inverse time definite overcurrent to add
InvOC Inherent Delay Opt
fixed 100 ms delay
99 calculated or external residual current option InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option
100 enable inverse time definite residual overcurrent
InvTime ROC Blk by Dir.
protection blocked by direction
101 inverse time definite residual overcurrent
InvTime ROC Direction Opt
protection direction
102 enable Inverse time definite residual overcurrent to
InvROC Inherent Delay Opt
add fixed 100 ms delay

A.5 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 2

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 pickup current Pickup Curr.
2 pickup current of calculated residual current Pickup ZS Curr.
3 pickup current of external true residual current Pickup Extern ZS Curr.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 183


Appendix A Setting Sheet

4 pickup value of “gap” residual overcurrent Pickup Gap ZS Curr.


5 pickup value of residual voltage Pickup ZS Volt.
6 negative sequence voltage setting for composite voltage
NS Volt. for Comp.Volt.Blk
blocking element
7 residual voltage setting of composite voltage blocking
LowVolt. for Comp.Volt.Blk
element
8 current setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 Curr.
9 time stage 1 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay 1
10 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix1
11 time stage 2 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay 2
12 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix2
13 current setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Stage2 Curr.
14 time stage 1 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 Delay 1
15 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix1
16 time stage 2 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 Delay 2
17 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix2
18 current setting of overcurrent prot. stage 3 OC Stage3 Curr.
19 time stage 1 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay 1
20 trip matrix of stage 1 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix1
21 time stage 2 of OC protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay 2
22 trip matrix of stage 2 of OC stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix2
23 residual voltage block ROC ZS Volt. Blk ROC
24 current setting of residual overcurrent prot.(ROC) stage 1 ROC Stage1 Curr.
25 time stage 1 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 Delay 1
26 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 TripMatrix1
27 time stage 2 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 Delay 2
28 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 1 ROC Stage1 TripMatrix2
29 current setting of residual overcurrent prot.(ROC) stage 2 ROC Stage2 Curr.
30 time stage 1 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay 1
31 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix1
32 time stage 2 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay 2
33 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix2
34 time stage 3 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 Delay3
35 trip matrix of stage 3 of ROC stage 2 ROC Stage2 TripMatrix3
36 current setting of residual overcurrent prot.(ROC) stage 3 ROC Stage3 Curr.
37 time stage 1 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 Delay 1
38 trip matrix of stage 1 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 TripMatrix1
39 time stage 2 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 Delay 2
40 trip matrix of stage 2 of ROC stage 3 ROC Stage3 TripMatrix2
41 voltage setting of gap residual over voltage protection
Gap ROV Volt.
(Gap ROV)
42 time stage 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 1
43 trip matrix of stage 1 of Gap ROV Gap ROV TripMatrix1
44 time stage 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV Delay 2

184 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

45 trip matrix of stage 2 of Gap ROV Gap ROV TripMatrix2


46 current setting of gap residual over current protection (Gap
Gap ROC Curr.
ROC)
47 time stage 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 1
48 trip matrix of stage 1 of Gap ROC Gap ROC TripMatrix1
49 time stage 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC Delay 2
50 trip matrix of stage 2 of Gap ROC Gap ROC TripMatrix2
51 pickup value of inverse time definite overcurrent protection InvTime OC Curr.
52 delay of inverse time definite overcurrent protection InvTime OC Delay
53 tripping logic setting of inverse time definite overcurrent prot. InvTime OC TripMatrix
54 pickup value of inverse time definite residual overcurrent prot. InvTime ROC Curr.
55 delay of inverse time definite residual overcurrent protection InvTime ROC Delay
56 tripping logic setting of inverse time definite residual
InvTime ROC TripMatrix
overcurrent protection
57 current setting of overload stage 1 OverLoad Stage1 Curr.
58 time setting of overload stage 1 OverLoad Stage1 Delay
59 current setting of overload stage 2 OverLoad Stage2 Curr.
60 Time setting of overload stage 2 OverLoad Stage2 Delay
61 current setting of air cooling initiating stage 1 CoolerStart Stage1 Curr.
62 time setting of air cooling initiating stage 1 CoolerStart Stage1 Delay
63 current setting of air cooling initiating stage 2 CoolerStart Stage2 Curr.
64 time setting of air cooling initiating stage 2 CoolerStart Stage2 Delay
65 overload block tap changer OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch
66 time setting of [OverLoad Curr Blk TapSwitch] OverLoad Delay Blk TapSwitch
Logic setting
67 OC stage 1 blocked by composite voltage element OC Stage1 Blk by CompVolt
68 OC stage 2 blocked by composite voltage element OC Stage2 Blk by CompVolt
69 OC stage 3 blocked by composite voltage element OC Stage3 Blk by CompVolt
70 OC stage 1 blocked by direction element OC Stage1 Blk by Direction
71 OC stage 2 blocked by direction element OC Stage2 Blk by Direction
72 OC stage 1 direction option OC Stage1 Direction Option
73 OC stage 2 direction option OC Stage2 Direction Option
74 ROC stage 1 blocked by residual volt. ROC Stage1 Blk by ZSVolt
75 ROC stage 2 blocked by residual volt. ROC Stage2 Blk by ZSVolt
76 ROC stage 1 blocked by direction element ROC Stage1 Blk by Direction
77 ROC stage 2 blocked by direction element ROC Stage2 Blk by Direction
78 ROC stage1 direction option ROC Stage1 Direction Option
79 ROC stage2 direction option ROC Stage2 Direction Option
80 residual current option for residual direction ZSCurr Option for ZS Dir.
81 ROC stage1 blocked by harmonics ROC Stage1 Blk by Harm.
82 ROC stage2 blocked by harmonics ROC Stage2 Blk by Harm.
83 residual current option for ROC stage1 ROC Stage1 ZSCurr Option
84 residual current option for ROC stage2 ROC Stage2 ZSCurr Option
85 Gap protection option Gap Protection Option

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 185


Appendix A Setting Sheet

86 overload stage 1 enabled Enable OverLoad Stage1


87 overload stage 2 enabled Enable OverLoad Stage2
88 cooler start stage 1 enabled Enable CoolerStart Stage1
89 cooler start stage 2 enabled Enable CoolerStart Stage2
90 [overload block tap changer] enabled Enable OverLoad Blk TapSwitch
91 VT supervision criterion VT Supervision Criterion
92 local VT out of service VT Out of Service
93 OC blocked by side 1 composite voltage OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt
94 OC blocked by side 3 composite voltage OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt
95 OC blocked by side 4 composite voltage OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt
96 inverse time definite overcurrent prot. blocked by direction InvTime OC Blk by Dir.
97 inverse time definite overcurrent protection direction InvTime OC Direction Opt
98 enable inverse time definite overcurrent protection to add
InvOC Inherent Delay Opt
fixed 100 ms delay
99 calculated or external residual current option InvTime ROC ZSCurr Option
100 enable inverse time definite residual overcurrent protection
InvTime ROC Blk by Dir.
blocked by direction
101 inverse time definite residual overcurrent prot. direction InvTime ROC Direction Opt
102 enable Inverse time definite residual overcurrent
InvROC Inherent Delay Opt
protection to add fixed 100 ms delay

A.6 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 3

No. Setting Abbreviation value


1 phase current fault detector Pickup Curr.
2 residual current fault detector Pickup ZS Volt.
3 negative sequence voltage for composite voltage blocking NS Volt for CompVolt.Blk
4 phase-to-phase undervoltage for composite voltage blocking LowVolt for CompVolt.Blk
5 overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 Curr.
6 delay of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay
7 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix
8 overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Stage2 Curr.
9 delay of overcurrent protection stage2 OC Stage2 Delay
10 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix
11 overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Curr.
12 delay of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay
13 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix
14 overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 Curr.
15 delay of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 Delay
16 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 TripMatrix
17 overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 Curr.
18 delay of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 Delay
19 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 TripMatrix
20 residual voltage protection ROV Volt
21 delay of residual voltage prot. stage 1 ROV Delay

186 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

22 tripping logic setting of residual voltage protection ROV TripMatrix


23 current of overload protection OverLoad Curr.
24 delay of overload protection OverLoad Delay
25 residual voltage alarm ROV Alarm Volt.
26 delay of residual voltage alarm ROV Alarm Delay
Logic setting
27 stage 1 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage1 Blk by CompVolt
28 stage 2 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage2 Blk by CompVolt
29 stage 3 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage3 Blk by CompVolt
30 stage 4 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage4 Blk by CompVolt
31 stage 5 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage5 Blk by CompVolt
32 overload alarm enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm
33 residual voltage alarm enabled Enable ROV Alarm
34 protection performance during VT circuit failure VT Supervision Criterion
35 voltage on local side disabled VT Out of Service
36 OC Blocked by Side4 Composite Voltage OC Blk by Side4 CompVolt
37 OC Blocked by Side1 Composite Voltage OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt
38 OC Blocked by Side2 Composite Voltage OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt

A.7 Settings of Backup Protection on Side 4

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 phase current fault detector Pickup Curr.
2 residual current fault detector Pickup ZS Volt.
3 negative sequence voltage for composite voltage blocking NS Volt for CompVolt.Blk
4 phase-to-phase undervoltage fore composite voltage blocking LowVolt for CompVolt.Blk
5 overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 Curr.
6 delay of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 Delay
7 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 1 OC Stage1 TripMatrix
8 overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Stage2 Curr.
9 delay of overcurrent protection stage2 OC Stage2 Delay
10 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 2 OC Stage2 TripMatrix
11 overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Curr.
12 delay of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 Delay
13 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 3 OC Stage3 TripMatrix
14 overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 Curr.
15 delay of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 Delay
16 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 4 OC Stage4 TripMatrix
17 overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 Curr.
18 delay of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 Delay
19 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection stage 5 OC Stage5 TripMatrix
20 residual voltage protection ROV Volt
21 delay of residual voltage prot. Stage 1 ROV Delay

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 187


Appendix A Setting Sheet

22 tripping logic setting of residual voltage protection ROV TripMatrix


23 current of overload protection OverLoad Curr.
24 delay of overload protection OverLoad Delay
25 residual voltage alarm ROV Alarm Volt.
26 delay of residual voltage alarm ROV Alarm Delay
Logic setting
27 stage 1 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage1 Blk by CompVolt
28 stage 2 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage2 Blk by CompVolt
29 stage 3 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage3 Blk by CompVolt
30 stage 4 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage4 Blk by CompVolt
31 stage 5 of overcurrent prot. blocked by composite voltage OC Stage5 Blk by CompVolt
32 overload alarm enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm
33 residual voltage alarm enabled Enable ROV Alarm
34 protection performance during VT circuit failure VT Supervision Criterion
35 voltage on local side disabled VT Out of Service
36 OC blocked by side 3 composite voltage OC Blk by Side3 CompVolt
37 OC blocked by side 1 composite voltage OC Blk by Side1 CompVolt
38 OC blocked by side 2 composite voltage OC Blk by Side2 CompVolt

A.8 Settings of Backup Protection of Common Winding

No. Setting Abbreviation Value


1 overcurrent fault detector Pickup Curr.
2 residual overcurrent fault detector Pickup ZS Curr.
3 residual current protection ROC Curr.
4 delay of residual current protection ROC Delay
5 tripping logic setting of residual current protection ROC TripMatrix
6 pickup value of inverse time definite residual overcurrent prot. InvTime ROC Curr.
7 delay of inverse time definite residual overcurrent protection InvTime ROC Delay
8 tripping logic setting of inverse time definite residual overcurrent prot. InvTime ROC TripMatrix
9 overcurrent protection OC Curr.
10 delay of overcurrent protection OC Delay
11 tripping logic setting of overcurrent protection OC TripMatrix
12 current of overload alarm OverLoad Curr.
13 delay of overload alarm OverLoad Delay
14 cooling initiation CoolerStart Curr.
15 delay of cooling initiation CoolerStart Delay
16 residual current alarm ROC Alarm Curr.
17 delay of residual current alarm ROC Alarm Delay
Logic setting
18 overload protection enabled Enable OverLoad Alarm
19 cooling initiation enabled Enable cooler Start
20 enable residual overcurrent alarm Enable Roc Alarm

188 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix A Setting Sheet

21 residual current protection blocked by harmonics ROC Blk by Harm


22 single phase CT or three phases CT option Three phase curr.
enable inverse time definite residual overcurrent protection to InvROC Inherent Delay
23
add fixed 100 ms delay Opt

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 189


Appendix A Setting Sheet

190 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (user version)

B.1 General

DBG2000 configuration and test program (user version) is developed for the user to configure, test
and maintain RCS-978 series transformer protection equipment on site. It comprises four parts:
sampled value display, settings reading and modification, report process and trip test. For
RCS-978E, these four parts correspond to 4 files 978x3_status, 978x3_set, 978x3_rpt and
978x3_tst respectively and are described hereinafter (X represent the special type the protection
program, for example, RCS-978E, here, x represent E).

Connect RS-232 communication port of the computer and that mounted on left side of front panel
of RCS- 978 protection equipment by a cable with DB-9 connectors on both ends. Run the
program DBG2000. If the connection is correct, the screen will display “RCS-978X3 connected”,
see Fig. B.1. Even if the computer is off line, this picture will be still displayed but the words about
connection will disappear.

Fig. B.1 RCS-978E being connected

There are 3 bars on top of the screen, from top to bottom: title bar, menu bar and tool bar, see Fig. B.2.

Fig. B.2 Title bar, menu bar and tool bar

First, click the first button of tool bar parameter, dialog box of communication parameters is
displayed, see Fig. B.3. Only the parameter of “COM port” shall be configured as the number of
port of computer that is actually connected with the equipment, other parameters shall be
configured as the same as displayed values in figure.

The title bar shows only title of the program and needs no explanation. Menu bar and tool bar are
described as follows:
B.1.1 Menu bar
There are five menus in the menu bar: File, Execute, View, Set and Help. Click button of each
menu, items will be pulled down, see Fig. B.4. The gray items are used not for the user version
but others.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 191


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Fig. B.3 Dialog box of communication parameters

Fig. B.4 Submenu of menu bar

1) File

There is only one item in pull-down menu File, i.e., Exit. Click Exit(X), the program will be exited.

2) Execute

There are three items in pull-down menu Execute: Setting(E), Download(D) and Trip_Test(T).

Click Setting(E), entering settings reading and modification part of the program, please refer to
section B.3 for details.

Item Download(D) is not used for this program but others.

Click Trip_Test(T), entering trip test part of the program, please refer to section B.5 for details.

3) View

There are five items in pull-down menu View: Toolbar(T), Status(S), Report(L), Status(Z) and
Message(M).

Item Toolbar specifies whether the tool bar shall be displayed. When the tool bar is displayed, a
symbol “√” is put before “Toolbar (T)”. If this item is clicked then, the tool bar will be hidden and
the symbol “√” will disappear.

192 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Item Status(S) specifies whether status bar in the bottom of the picture shall be displayed.

Click Report(L), entering Report treatment part of the program, please refer to section B.4 for details.

Click Status(Z), entering Sampled value display part of the program, see section B.2 for details

Click Message(M), data flow between DBG2000 program and the protection equipment will be
displayed. This is used not for the user version but development version of the program.

4) Set

There are five items in pull-down menu Set: Switch_CPU_MON(P), Parameter(C), Back_color(B),
Font-Color(F) and Font(O).

If there is a symbol “√” before item Switch_CPU_MON(P), that means data acquired by module CPU
are displayed currently, see Fig. B.1. If the item Switch_CPU_MON(P) is clicked then, the data
displayed will be changed to those acquired by module MON, see Fig. B.5. Meanwhile, symbol “√” will
disappear.

Fig. B.5 Switching on data acquired by module MON

Function of item Parameter(C) is the same as the first button of tool bar parameter. Click this item,
dialog box of communication parameters will be displayed, see Fig. B.3.

Click Back_Color(B), dialog box of background color is displayed. The user can select preferred color
for background displayed.

Click Font_Color(F), dialog box of font color is displayed. The user can select preferred color for font
displaying.

Click Font(O), dialog box of name, style and size of the font is displayed. The user can select the
preferred ones for font displaying.

5) Help

There are three items in pull-down menu Help: Help(H), Version(N) and About Dbg2000.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 193


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Click Help(H), commands used for the program will be displayed. It is not necessary for the user to
use these commands, and no further information about them is presented here.

Click Version(N), historical record about time and description of updating of this program is displayed.

Click About Dbg2000, developer of this program and copyright declaration will be displayed.

B.1.2 Tool bar


There are 23 buttons in the tool bar, in which 16 buttons are enabled. They are depicted in sequence
from left to right as follows:

1) Parameter
Function of this button is the same as that of item Parameter(C) of menu Set of the menu bar. Click
this button, dialog box of communication parameters will be displayed, see Fig. B.3.

2) Data parameter
Click this button, other parameters will be displayed. They are data start address, data block size,
single data block number, report data number, etc, 11 items in total. These parameters are configured
already in the coefficient y and needs no further Configuration on site.

3) Device type

Click this button, a small dialog box “please enter device type” is displayed. Type of the protection
equipment shall be entered. In the RCS-978E case, the device type is 978e3. This is used mainly for
the user to make configuration in off line condition.

4) Setting
Function of this button is the same as item Setting(E) of menu Execute of menu bar. Click this button,
i.e. entering settings reading and modification part of the program; Please refer to section B.3 for
details.

5) Status
Function of this button is the same as item Status(Z) of menu View of menu bar. Click this button,
entering Sampled value display part of the program; Please refer to section B.2 for details.

6) Report
Function of this button is the same as item Report(L) of menu View of menu bar. Click this button,
entering Report view part of the program; Please refer to section B.2 for details.

7) Trip test
Click this button, entering trip test part of the program; Please refer to section B.2 for details.

8) Switch to command
When several dialog boxes are displayed, and the operator wants to enter Command mode but not
close dialog box, this button can be used to switch on Command and hide dialog boxes. However, it is
not needed for the user on site generally.

9) Download program
This button is used not for this program but others.

194 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

10) CPU<–>MON
Function of this button is the same as item Switch_CPU_MON(P) of menu Set of menu bar. Click this
button, data displayed will be changed between those acquired by module CPU and module MON one
after another.

11) Set font

Function of this button is the same as item Font(O) of menu Set of menu bar.

12) Set font color

Function of this button is the same as item Font_Color(F) of menu Set of menu bar.

13) Set background color


Function of this button is the same as item Back_Color(B) of menu Set of menu bar.

Six buttons on right hand of are all gray. They are used not for this
version but others of this program.

14) SIG RESET


Click this button, all activated output relays and signal relays will be reset.

15) Synchronize time


This function is not used for the program of RCS-978.

16) Help
Function of this button is the same as item Help(H) of menu Help of menu bar.

Besides, some shortcut keys on keyboard of the computer have same functions with items of menu of
menu bar or buttons of tool bar:

F1 — same as item Help(H) of menu Help and button Help of tool bar;
F2 — same as item Parameter(C) of menu Set and button Parameter of tool bar;
F3 — same as item Switch_CPU_MON(P) of menu Set and button CPU<->MON of tool bar;
F4 — same as item Setting(E) of menu Execute and button Setting of tool bar;
F5 — same as item Status(S) of menu View and button Status of tool bar;
F6 — same as item Report(L) of menu View and button Report of tool bar.

B.2 Sampled Value Displaying

Click item Status(S) of menu View or button Status of tool bar, real time sampled analog
values will be displayed.

Click label , Fig. B.6 a) and b) will be displayed. They can be exchanged to
each other by clicking two arrows on left hand of the bottom or pull down box
on right hand of the bottom “Virtual_binary input/Others_Binary_Input”.
Page 1 shows enabling (“1”) and disabling (“0”) of functions:

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 195


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

a) Page 1

b) Page 2

Fig. B.6 Binary input status(module CPU)

Page 2 shows pickup of protective elements as well as others binary input status where “1” is “yes”
and “0” is “no”.

Fig. B.6 a) and b) are pictures of value of module CPU, and can be changed to value of module
MON by CPU-MON choose item at the right hand of bottom of this page.

196 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Fig. B.7 Phase angle between phase voltages of all sides

Fig. B.8 Phase angles between voltages and currents of all sides

Pull down box at right hand of the bottom is gray. That means these values exist only in module
MON and cannot be read from module CPU.

B.3 Settings Reading and Modification

This part is used for reading and modification of settings of the equipment. Click item Setting(E) of
menu Execute or the fourth button Setting of tool bar, settings will be displayed. For example,
Fig. B.9 shows the parameters of the equipment.

Click label in picture of Setting(E), parameters of the equipment will be displayed as


shown in Fig. B.9.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 197


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Fig. B.9 Parameter of the equipment

In the same way, user can click other labels in picture of Setting(E) to read and modification all the
settings of the equipment.

There are 7 buttons in bottom of every picture of the part Settings reading and modification. From
left to right, they are: PRINT, DEFAULT, UPLOAD, DOWNLOAD, READ, SAVE and CLOSE and
depicted as follows:

− PRINT: Print settings displayed in current picture.


− DEFAULT: Read and display default settings of RCS-978 from file of DBG2000.
− UPLOAD: Read and display actual settings of RCS-978 connected with the PC.
− DOWNLOAD: Send current settings displayed on PC to RCS-978 connected.
− READ: Read settings from a file saved in computer.
− SAVE: Save current settings displayed in the computer as a file.
− CLOSE: Close current dialog box.

If default settings are displayed and button UPLOAD is pressed, default settings displayed will be
replaced by actual settings of the protection equipment, in which, the settings different from default
settings will be displayed in red. Vice versa, if actual settings are displayed and button DEFAULT is
pressed, actual settings displayed will be replaced by default settings of the protection equipment,
in which, the settings different from actual settings will be displayed in red.

B.4 Report

There are 3 kinds of reports in this program: tripping report, self-diagnose report and change of
status report. The tripping report is displayed first.

B.4.1 Tripping report

Click item Report(L) of menu View, or click the sixth button of tool bar, tripping report will be
displayed for a moment. It is the report of operation of protection relays, including number of the
report, time of pickup of protection, time interval from pickup to operation, name of the operating
protection element and the faulty phase, see Fig. B.10.

198 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Fig. B.10 Tripping report

In order to save time for displaying, report of the latest 3 tripping is displayed firstly. Click the fifth
button REFRESH of eight buttons in the bottom of the picture, complete tripping report will be
displayed after a longer delay, see Fig. B.11.

If oscillogram record of a fault tripping is needed, the record item shall be clicked first, color of this
item will be changed to light blue, click the fourth button RECORD at the bottom, then DBG2000
starts to read oscillogram data from the protection equipment.

Oscillogram data is massive and more time is needed to read it. A dialog block of saving the data
displayed as a file will be displayed when data reading is completed. If these data are saved in a
file and then oscillogram recorded can be displayed by oscillogram analysis program Drawing.exe
or Wave.exe developed by our Company. The oscillogram can be analyzed also if needed.

The sixth button SAVE at the bottom is used for saving the report as a file in the computer. The
seventh button PRINT is used to print the report. All reports of this program can be saved as file
or printed in this way. The eighth button CLOSE is used to close the picture displayed.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 199


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

B.4.2 Diagnose report

After click the second button FAIL at bottom of Fig. B.11, self-diagnose report will be displayed for
a moment. It is the report of hardware failures, overload, cooling system initiating or other
abnormal events detected by the equipment, see Fig. B.12.

Fig. B.12 Diagnose report

The records are stored in cyclic non-volatile memory and up to 32 events can be recorded.

B.4.3 Change of status report

After click the third button SW CHG at the bottom of Fig. B.12, change of status input report will be
displayed for a moment. It is the report of binary input, starting status of the equipment, including
serial number of record, time of the change and brief description about the change, see Fig. B.13.

Fig. B.13 Change of status report

The records are stored in cyclic non-volatile memory and up to 32 events can be recorded.

200 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

B.5 Trip Tests

The Trip tests comprise two items: protection tripping test and communication with the host
computer test.

Object of the tripping test is to check activation of the tripping or signal output relays of the
equipment during the test not by applying voltages and currents on the equipment but by operation
of the program.

Object of the communication with the host computer test is to check correctness of the message
sent from the equipment during the test not by applying voltages and currents on the equipment
but by operation of the program.

B.5.1 Protection tripping test (only for special type of equipment)

First, parameter [Test_Trip_Option] shall be set as enabled, if available.

Then, click item Trip_Test(T) in menu Execute, or click the seventh button of tool bar Trip test,
picture of protection tripping test will be displayed as shown in Fig. B.14.

There is only one item in the picture, i.e., Test_Differential_Trip, differential protection tripping test,
click the test button , related output relays will operate, and correspondent signals will
be sent. Correctness of these operations can be checked and this button changes to
then.

Click the red reset button again, all of the operated relays will dropout, test status will be resumed
and the reset button will return to .

Fig. B.14 Protection tripping test

B.5.2 Communication with the host computer test

First, the parameters of [Test_Trip_Option] and [Test_Comm_Option] (if available) shall be set
as enabled.

Click label in Fig. B.15, picture of communication with the host computer will be
displayed as shown in Fig. B.15.

NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD 201


Appendix B DBG2000 for RCS-978 (User Version)

Fig. B.15 Communication with host computer test (page 1)

Click test button of any item, relevant activation of this item will be recorded in the
report.

The report will be sent to the host computer, and correctness of the communication can be
checked then.

202 NANJING NARI-RELAYS ELECTRIC CO., LTD

You might also like